JP4528736B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, displays a plurality of types of effect images including a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and is variable after a variable display execution condition is satisfied. It is provided with image display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified when a display start condition is satisfied, and after the display result of the variable display of identification information becomes the specific display result, the player The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls an advantageous specific gaming state.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it can be changed by displaying predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”) by updating or scrolling. There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that performs variable display and determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result.

  Some variable display games are played by using the above display device as an image display device. In such a variable display game, the change of the display symbol is started based on the detection of the game ball passing through the start winning opening (the start condition of the variable display is satisfied), and the stop when the change of the display symbol is completely stopped. A game in which a case of a symbol (determined symbol) is a specific display mode is a “big hit”. When a “big hit” occurs in the variable display game, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. This state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”.

As such a gaming machine, as an effect of updating the display symbol in the symbol display region of the image display device, the symbol display region is divided into two upper and lower regions, and a part of the display symbol divided by the divided regions is displayed. Have been proposed to vary each independently (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
JP 2002-136698 A

In addition, there has been proposed a method in which a display symbol is divided into a plurality of display symbol parts and separated and displayed, and a new display symbol appears between the plurality of display symbol parts.
JP-A-9-131434

In addition, image data for generating a predetermined image in advance is read out from a storage device (for example, CGROM or the like) in which various image data used for display effects in a gaming machine is stored. It has been proposed to reduce the control burden for display effects by storing the image data in a predetermined area and making the image data available as frame data (for example, Patent Document 3).
JP 2004-201859 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, since two display symbols are suddenly synthesized and displayed, the display image is suddenly changed. In the technique described in Patent Document 2, a new display symbol suddenly appears between a plurality of display symbol portions. For this reason, with the techniques described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the presentation effect during the display variation display.

  In the technique described in Patent Document 3, when image data stored in a storage device is read and stored in a predetermined area of the image memory, a read address serving as a read position in the storage device, a write position in the image memory, and It is necessary to specify a write address. When image data stored in a predetermined area of the image memory is used as frame data, the frame data indicated by the write address is read out by designating the read address as the read position in the image memory. It is necessary to write to the writing position. Thus, conventionally, in order to use the image data read from the storage device as frame data, all addresses to be read and write positions in the storage device, the image memory, the frame buffer, etc. must be specified. It was. Therefore, there is a problem that the address management of the image data becomes complicated.

  With respect to this problem, only the read address that becomes the read position in the storage device and the write address that becomes the write position in the frame buffer can be specified, and the address in the image memory can be automatically set according to the use status of the image memory. It is also possible to do so. However, when all the address settings in the image memory are automated, the storage position of the image data in the image memory changes variously. For this reason, it becomes difficult to reuse the image data once stored in the image memory, and the image data necessary for the display effect must be read from the storage device and written to the image memory every time. As a result, frequently used image data is frequently read out from the storage device, and the control burden on display effects increases.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and improves the effect of presentation during the variable display of the display symbol serving as identification information, and facilitates the address management of the image data to increase the control burden in the display presentation. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be prevented.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application provides a plurality of types of effect images (for example, images showing decorative symbols, etc.) each including a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified. After the display of the characters CH1 to CH4, the background image, etc.) and the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball has won the start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6) Image display for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each variable display start condition (for example, the previous special figure game by the special symbol display device 4 or the end of the big hit game state). Means (for example, the image display device 5), and after the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (for example, a definite decorative pattern of the jackpot combination) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to an advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), an operation means (for example, an operation switch 40 or the like) that can be operated by the player, Game control means for controlling the progress (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) and display control means for controlling the display operation of the image display means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 120 and the display control unit 121) are provided. The game control means determines in advance whether or not the variable information display result of the identification information is used as the specific display result according to the establishment of the variable display start condition (for example, the CPU 114 performs steps S601 to S607). And the display control means is configured to display the image based on a determination result of the prior determination means. Display content determination means (for example, CPU 131, ROM 132, RAM 133, etc. provided in the production control microcomputer 120) for determining the display content of the stage, and the image display of the effect image in the image display means based on the determination result of the display content determination means Image display control means (for example, display control unit 121) for controlling the image display data, and the image display control means stores image element data storage means for storing a plurality of types of image element data including image element data corresponding to the effect image. (For example, CGROM 142), temporary storage means for temporarily storing the image element data read from the image element data storage means (for example, the image element temporary storage memory 155), and the image display means based on the image element data Executes processing to create display data for effect images in Data processing means (for example, transfer control circuit 152, drawing circuit 154), display data storage means (for example, frame buffer memory 156) for storing display data created by the data processing means, and display data Display data output means (for example, a display circuit 157) for outputting the display data read from the storage means to the image display means, and the display content determination means corresponds to the activation of the display control means, The start-up setting control means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S61 to S63) for controlling various setting operations in the image display control means, and the image display based on the determination result of the prior determination means A predetermined notice in the effect image in a predetermined period of the period in which the identification information is variably displayed by the means Preliminary effect display determining means for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect display for notifying that the variable display of the identification information is in a predetermined display mode according to the output image (for example, a part where the CPU 131 executes the process of step S337). Display image update command means (for example, CPU 131) for notifying the image display control means of the reading position of the image element data and the writing position in the display data storage means and instructing update of the display image in the image display means. Includes a part for executing the display update command process in step S355) and an operation determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated (for example, a part for the CPU 131 to execute the processes in steps S713 and S783). The data processing means is a reading position of the image element data notified from the display image update command means. When included in the temporary storage means, first image element data processing means (for example, a drawing circuit) that reads image element data from a reading position in the temporary storage means and writes and stores it in a writing position in the display data storage means 154 is a part for executing the fixed address designation display process in step S503) and the image element data storage position includes the image element data read position notified from the display image update command means. After the image element data is read from the reading position in the data storage means and transferred to a predetermined area (for example, the automatic transfer area 155B) in the temporary storage means, the image element data is read from the predetermined area and stored in the display data storage means. Second image element data processing means for writing and storing in the writing position (For example, the part in which the transfer control circuit 152 executes the automatic transfer control process in step S407 and the part in which the drawing circuit 154 executes the automatic transfer display process in step S505) and the notice effect display by the notice effect display determination unit Based on the decision to execute, the image element data including the display color data of each pixel constituting the notice effect image is read before the predetermined period starts (for example, notice image element data reading means) The transfer control circuit 152 controls the display operation of the notice effect image in correspondence with the image element data read by the notice image element data reading means, and the like. Control data setting means for setting control data (for example, the drawing circuit 154 sets the alpha value in step S507). Process, a portion for executing the process of step S852), the image element data read by the preview image element data reading means, and the control data set by the control data setting means. Step display update for updating display data so that a notice effect image is displayed step by step as time passes in response to a determination that the operation unit has been operated by the operation determination unit Means (for example, the part where the drawing circuit 154 executes the alpha test process of step S509 according to the processing of steps S719, S723, and S724 by the CPU 131, or the drawing circuit 154 performs the alpha synthesis process according to the processing of steps S789 and S794 by the CPU 131 And the starting time setting control means includes: Startup area setting control means (for example, the CPU 131 stores the storage area setting command in step S62) that sets the storage area in the temporary storage means to a plurality of areas including the predetermined area (for example, the fixed address area 155A and the automatic transfer area 155B). And a portion corresponding to the image element data among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means following the setting by the startup area setting control means. Image element data (for example, image element data registered in the advance transfer setting table 211A) whose execution frequency of image display by the effect image is higher than the execution frequency of image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data, Start-up rotation for transferring and storing in a storage area other than the predetermined area in the temporary storage means. Transmission setting control means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the pre-transfer command process in step S63). Here, the required image element data is a predetermined part of image element data (for example, among a plurality of types of notice effects) among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means. Image element data indicating a character image used in the notice effect with the highest hit reliability, image element data indicating an effect image in the reach effect having the highest hit reliability among a plurality of types of reach effects, or a gaming machine All or part of image element data not to be transferred to a storage area other than the predetermined area in the temporary storage means, such as image element data indicating an effect image that is not displayed in the current effect state That's fine. The temporary storage means only needs to have a faster reading speed of stored data than the image element data storage means. In addition, the predetermined period during which the notice effect display can be executed is a stage where the display result of the variable display of the identification information is not yet derived and displayed, and satisfies the condition that the identification information already derived and displayed becomes the specific display result. It may be a period including either before or after reaching the reach. In addition, the predetermined display mode to be notified in advance by the announcement effect display may be that the display mode of the variable display of the identification information is reach, or the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result. It may be.

  3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the display content determination means is configured to determine a transfer condition (for example, that a demo screen is displayed or the number of executions of the special game is predetermined) corresponding to the progress of the game. The number of times, the display result was a big hit, etc.), and the effect corresponding to the image element data among the plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means A transfer condition is established that instructs image element data to be transferred to a storage area other than the predetermined area, with the image element display frequency being higher than the image display execution frequency corresponding to the required image element data. Time command means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes pre-transfer command processing in steps S296 and S360), and the data processing means includes the transfer condition In response to a command from the standing time command means, an image element whose execution frequency of image display by a rendering image corresponding to the image element data is required is selected from among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means. And a data transfer means at the time of establishment that reads out image element data higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the data from the image element data storage means and transfers it to a storage area other than the predetermined storage area ( For example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the pre-transfer process in step S405 in response to the pre-transfer command process in steps S296 and S360 by the CPU 131).

  4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the image display control means includes transfer completion data indicating that data transfer from the image element data storage means to the temporary storage means has been completed (for example, data indicating a transfer completion flag). ) Is set in a storage management table (for example, index table 251 or the like) that can specify image element data temporarily stored in the temporary storage unit (for example, the transfer control circuit 152 performs steps S446, S466, The data processing means includes the image element data read from the temporary storage means in response to whether transfer completion data is set in the storage management table. Deciding whether or not to create display data by writing to the display data storage means Cormorant including the creation determination means (e.g., drawing circuit 154 and a portion that executes the processing in steps S522, S542, S561).

  5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the display content determination means determines the display mode of the effect image on the image display means as one of a plurality of types of display modes when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Means (for example, an effect mode flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133, a portion where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S298 to S300, etc.), and the display mode of the effect image determined by the display mode determining means Corresponding to the image element data storage means, among the plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image element data corresponds to the required image element data. Image element data specifying means for specifying image element data higher than the execution frequency of image display by an image (for example, C In the pre-transfer command process executed by U131 in step S301, the display mode determination unit determines the display mode of the effect image, and the display mode determination unit determines the display mode of the effect image. Correspondingly, the display mode determination data transfer command means (for example, the CPU 131 sends a command to step S301) that instructs to transfer the image element data specified by the image element data specifying means to a storage area other than the predetermined area. In the pre-transfer command process executed in step S180, etc., and the data processing unit stores the image element data according to a command from the display mode determination data transfer command unit Among the plurality of types of image element data stored in the means, The image element data read by the image element data storage means is read out from the image element data storage means, and the image display execution frequency by the effect image is higher than the image display execution frequency by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data. Display mode determination data transfer means for transferring to the storage area (for example, a portion in which the transfer control circuit 152 executes the pre-transfer process in step S405 in response to the pre-transfer command process in step S301 by the CPU 131).

  6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the notice effect display determining means selects one of a plurality of kinds of notice effect images at different selection ratios for each type in accordance with a determination result of the prior decision means. Including an effect image selection means (for example, a portion where the CPU 131 executes the process of step S337), and the notice image element data reading means includes a plurality of types of images corresponding to a plurality of kinds of the notice effect images from the image element data storage means. It includes a preview image element data transfer means (for example, a portion where the transfer control circuit 152 executes the processes of steps S484 and S485) for reading out the element data, transferring it to the temporary storage means, and storing it. Of the plurality of types of image element data stored in the temporary storage means by the notice image element data transfer means, Control data for displaying the notice effect image stepwise is set for the image element data corresponding to the notice effect image selected by the effect image selection means (for example, the drawing circuit 154 performs the processing of steps S562 and S563). An alpha value corresponding to the blend ratio is set for the portion to be executed or the image element data indicating the character image used by the drawing circuit 154 in the notice pattern in step S852, while the character image is not used in the notice pattern. For the image element data indicating, the alpha value is set to “0”).

  7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the stage display update unit selects a pixel to be displayed based on the control data set by the control data setting unit among the pixels constituting the notice effect image. While displaying on the display means, by limiting the display of pixels other than the display target, a process of displaying the notice effect image step by step with the passage of time is executed (for example, steps S719, S723, and S724 by the CPU 131). Depending on the processing, the drawing circuit 154 executes the alpha test processing in step S509).

  8. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the stage display update means sequentially displays the notice effect image over time by sequentially synthesizing the notice effect image and the effect image other than the notice effect image. (For example, a portion where the drawing circuit 154 executes alpha synthesis processing in accordance with the processing of steps SS789 and S794 by the CPU 131).

  9. The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the game control means determines a gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended based on a determination that the specific display result is made by the prior determination means. A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), a first special gaming state (for example, a first probability variation gaming state, etc.) that has a higher probability of being the specific display result than the normal gaming state, and the specific display result. Any of the second special gaming state (for example, the second probability variable gaming state, etc.) that has a higher probability than the normal gaming state and the execution condition of the variable display is likely to be established compared to the normal gaming state and the first special gaming state. Gaming state determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 114 executes the processing of steps S608 to S619) and a game based on the determination result of the gaming state determining means Based on the game state control means for controlling the state (for example, the part where the CPU 114 executes the processing of steps S233 to S242) and the pre-decision means determined to be the specific display result, the first And first notification effect execution determining means (for example, CPU 114) for determining whether or not to execute a first notification effect (for example, a probability variation re-lottery effect or the like) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to one of the second special gaming state. S672 to S674, etc.) and whether or not to be controlled to the second special gaming state based on the fact that the pre-determining means has determined that the specific display result is to be made Second notification effect execution determining means (for example, the CPU 114 performs steps S643 to S64) that determines whether or not the second notification effect (for example, the advantageous reopening lottery effect) is executed. 45, a portion for executing the processing of S649 to S651, and the like, and a first notification effect control signal (for example, variable display start # 1 to # 10, # 65) that can specify the determination result of the first notification effect execution determination means. And the second notification effect control signal (for example, commands of display result notifications # 4 to # 7) that can specify the determination result of the second notification effect execution determination means. Control signal transmission means (for example, a portion where the CPU 114 executes the processes of steps S646, S647, S652, S653, and S684), and the display control means is configured to control the specific display result to a normal gaming state. A specific table for determining whether to be a first specific display result corresponding to or a second specific display result corresponding to being controlled to one of the first and second special gaming states Corresponding to the specified result determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processing of steps S325 and S326) and the fact that the first notification effect is to be executed based on the first notification effect control signal. First notification effect execution control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 131 executes the probability variation re-lottery effect control process in step S375) that executes the first notification effect after the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the second Corresponding to the fact that the second notification effect is to be executed based on the notification effect control signal, the second notification effect execution control for executing the second notification effect after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the advantageous opening re-lottery effect control process in step S376), and the specific display result determining means includes the first notification. In response to the fact that the execution of the first notification effect is specified based on the outgoing control signal, the game state determination means determines to control to one of the first and second special game states. Even so, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is determined as the first specific display result (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the process of step S327 corresponding to the determination of Yes in step S325). Note that the first and second notification effect control signals may be included in the same control signal, for example, one of the variable display start command and the display result notification command.

  10. The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the game control means determines a gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended based on a determination that the specific display result is made by the prior determination means. A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), a first special gaming state (for example, a first probability variation gaming state, etc.) that has a higher probability of being the specific display result than the normal gaming state, and the specific display result. Any of the second special gaming state (for example, the second probability variable gaming state, etc.) that has a higher probability than the normal gaming state and the execution condition of the variable display is likely to be established compared to the normal gaming state and the first special gaming state. Gaming state determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 114 executes the processing of steps S608 to S619) and a game based on the determination result of the gaming state determining means Based on the game state control means for controlling the state (for example, the part where the CPU 114 executes the processing of steps S233 to S242) and the pre-decision means determined to be the specific display result, the first And first notification effect execution determining means (for example, CPU 114) for determining whether or not to execute a first notification effect (for example, a probability variation re-lottery effect or the like) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to one of the second special gaming state. S672 to S674, etc.) and whether or not to be controlled to the second special gaming state based on the fact that the pre-determining means has determined that the specific display result is to be made Second notification effect execution determining means (for example, the CPU 114 performs steps S643 to S64) that determines whether or not the second notification effect (for example, the advantageous reopening lottery effect) is executed. 45, a portion for executing the processing of S649 to S651, and the like, and a first notification effect control signal (for example, variable display start # 1 to # 10, # 65) that can specify the determination result of the first notification effect execution determination means. And the second notification effect control signal (for example, commands of display result notifications # 4 to # 7) that can specify the determination result of the second notification effect execution determination means. Control signal transmission means (for example, a portion where the CPU 114 executes the processes of steps S646, S647, S652, S653, and S684), and the display control means is configured to control the specific display result to a normal gaming state. A specific table for determining whether to be a first specific display result corresponding to or a second specific display result corresponding to being controlled to one of the first and second special gaming states The display result determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processes of steps S325 and S326) and the second specific display result are set as the first special display result corresponding to being controlled to the first special gaming state. Or a special display result determining means for determining whether the second special display result corresponds to being controlled to the second special gaming state (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the processes of steps S328 and S329), Corresponding to the fact that the first notification effect is to be executed based on the first notification effect control signal, the first notification effect for executing the first notification effect after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on the execution control means (for example, the part where the CPU 131 executes the probability variation re-lottery effect control process in step S375) and the second notification effect control signal, the second report Corresponding to the fact that the effect is to be executed, the second notification effect execution control means (for example, the CPU 131 executes the advantageous release reactivation in step S376) that executes the second notification effect after the specific display result is derived and displayed. The special display result determination means is determined to be the second specific display result by the specific display result determination means, and the notification effect control signal transmission means. Corresponding to the fact that the second notification effect control signal is specified by the transmitted second notification effect control signal, the game state determination means determines to control the second special game state. Also, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is determined as the first special display result (for example, in response to the determination of Yes in step S328, the CPU 131 scans). Such as the part that performs the processing of-up S330). Note that the first and second notification effect control signals may be included in the same control signal, for example, one of the variable display start command and the display result notification command.

  The present invention has the following effects.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the notice image element data reading means reads image data including display color data of each pixel constituting the notice effect image in the notice effect display before the predetermined period is started. . The stage display update means displays the notice effect image step by step in response to the determination that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means during a predetermined period in which the notice effect display is executed. In addition, the display data is updated.
Accordingly, by visually displaying the notice effect image in the notice effect display step by step in response to the operation of the operation means, it is possible to execute visually novel notice effect display, and during the variable display of the identification information It is possible to improve the effect of the notice effect display that is executed. Further, a notice effect display can be executed without a sense of incongruity in a predetermined period corresponding to the operation of the operation means, and it is not necessary to specify image data to be read after the operation means is operated. Can reduce the control burden.
In addition, among the plural types of image element data, the image element data whose execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image element data is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data Is transferred and stored in the storage area other than the predetermined area in the temporary storage means in response to the activation of the display control means by the startup transfer setting control means. When the read position of the image element data notified from the display image update command means is included in the temporary storage means, the first image element data processing means reads the image element data from the read position in the temporary storage means and displays it. The data is written and stored in the writing position in the data storage means. On the other hand, when the image element data reading position notified from the display image update command means is included in the image element data storage means, the second image element data processing means starts from the reading position in the image element data storage means. After reading and transferring to a predetermined area in the temporary storage means, the image element data is read from the predetermined area and written and stored in the writing position in the display data storage means.
Thus, for the image element data transferred to the predetermined area in the temporary storage means, if the read position in the image element data storage means and the write position in the display data storage means are designated, the storage position of the temporary storage means It can be used to create display data without specifying the address, address management becomes easy, and the burden of program design can be reduced. On the other hand, it is necessary to read image element data each time from the image element data storage means for image element data whose execution frequency of the image display by the corresponding effect image is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data. Therefore, the control burden on the display effect can be reduced.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, the established data transfer means is stored in the image element data storage means in response to a command from the transfer condition satisfaction command means based on the establishment of a predetermined transfer condition. Among the plurality of types of image element data, the image element data whose execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image element data is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data Are read from the image element data storage means and transferred to a storage area other than the predetermined area.
As a result, with respect to image element data whose image display execution frequency by the corresponding effect image is higher than the image display execution frequency by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data, the stored contents of the temporary storage means are erroneous due to noise or the like. Even if this occurs, the stored contents can be automatically restored.

In the gaming machine according to claim 3, the image element data read out from the temporary storage means by the creation determination means in the display data storage means in correspondence with whether or not transfer completion data is set in the storage management table. It is determined whether or not to create display data by writing.
This makes it possible to match the image element data transferred from the image element data storage means to the temporary storage means and the image element data read from the temporary storage means and used to create display data. A display effect using image element data can be performed.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4, the image element data specifying means stores a plurality of types of images stored in the image element data storage means corresponding to the display mode of the effect image determined by the display mode determining means. Among the element data, the image element data is identified such that the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image element data is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data. The determination time data transfer instruction means instructs transfer of the image element data specified by the image element data specifying means. The display mode determination time data transfer means reads the image element data from the image element data storage means and transfers it to a storage area other than the predetermined area in the temporary storage means in response to a command from the display mode determination time data transfer command means. To do.
This makes it possible to change the image element data to be transferred and stored in a storage area other than the predetermined area in the temporary storage unit corresponding to the display mode of the effect image, and to effectively use the temporary storage unit to control the display effect in the display effect. Can be further reduced.

In the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, the notice effect image selecting means selects any one of a plurality of types of the notice effect images with different selection ratios for each type according to the determination result of the prior decision means. The notice image element data transfer means reads a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of kinds of notice effect images from the image element data storage means, and transfers them to the temporary storage means for storage. The control data setting means includes image element data corresponding to the notice effect image selected by the notice effect image selecting means among the plural types of image element data stored in the temporary storage means by the notice image element data transfer means. On the other hand, control data for displaying the notice effect image step by step is set.
As a result, the notice effect image selected at different selection ratios for each type according to the determination result of the predetermining means can be displayed step by step, and a visually novel notice effect display can be executed. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation for improving the effect in the notice effect display executed during the variable display and to obtain a specific display result, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine according to claim 6, the stage display update unit causes the image display unit to display a pixel to be displayed based on control data among the pixels constituting the notice effect image, while the display target By restricting the display of pixels other than those, a process of displaying the notice effect image step by step with the passage of time is executed.
Thereby, the notice effect image in the notice effect display is displayed step by step, and the visually novel notice effect display can be executed, thereby improving the effect in the notice effect display executed during the variable display of the identification information. be able to.

In the gaming machine according to claim 7, the stage display update means sequentially displays the preview effect image as time passes by sequentially combining the preview effect image and the effect image other than the preview effect image. Execute the process.
Thereby, the notice effect image in the notice effect display is displayed step by step, and the visually novel notice effect display can be executed, thereby improving the effect in the notice effect display executed during the variable display of the identification information. be able to.

In the gaming machine according to claim 8, in response to the fact that the first notification effect is to be executed based on the first notification effect control signal, the game state determination means performs the first and second special games. Even if it has been decided to control to any one of the states, the specific display result determining means determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the first specific display result.
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the first notification effect is performed even though the variable display result of the identification information becomes the second specific display result.

In the gaming machine according to claim 9, it is specified that the variable display result of the identification information is determined as the second specific display result and that the second notification effect is executed based on the second notification effect control signal. In response to this, even if it is determined by the gaming state determination means that the second special gaming state is to be controlled, the specific display mode determination means changes the display mode of the second specific display result to the first display mode. decide.
Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the second notification effect is performed even though the display mode of the second specific display result is the second display mode.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. Above the central position of the game area, a special symbol display device 4 is provided that displays (variably displays) a special symbol as identifiable identification information in a variable manner.

  Below the special symbol display device 4, for example, a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from the special symbols, or an image that provides a predetermined effect display, for example, are displayed. An image display device 5 that can display various types of effect images is provided. Below the image display device 5, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6 that forms a start winning opening is arranged. Below the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that forms a large winning opening and an ordinary symbol display apparatus 20 are provided. The normal symbol display device 20 includes a light emitting diode (LED) or the like, and an execution condition is that a game ball that has passed through a passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 (FIG. 2). In the normal game, the lighting, blinking, coloring, etc. are controlled. When a display with a predetermined hit pattern is performed in this normal figure game, the display result in the normal figure game is "win" (normal hit), and the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is set for a predetermined time. Tilt is controlled until elapses.

  The special symbol display device 4 includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs. The special symbol display device 4 is, for example, “0” in a special game as a variable display game that is performed based on the fact that a start condition is established by winning a game ball in a start winning opening formed by the normal variable pay ball device 6. ”To“ 9 ”, special symbols composed of numbers and the like are variably displayed. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol, for example, the same number as the number indicated by each symbol. The special symbol display device 4 variably displays more types of symbols such as numbers indicating “00” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. It may be configured to.

  In the special symbol game performed by the special symbol display device 4, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the variation of the special symbol, the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game on the special symbol display device 4, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and a special symbol other than the big bonus symbol is displayed. If it is stopped, it will be “lost”. When the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state by opening and closing the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as a specific example, a special symbol indicating “3” or “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating other numerical values is a lost symbol.

  In the big hit game state based on the special symbol indicating “3” or “7” which is a big hit symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, the special variable winning ball device 7 The opening / closing plate opens the large winning opening for a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, and the surface of the game board 2 is kept open. The falling game ball is received and a prize can be awarded to the grand prize opening, and then the round is closed by closing the grand prize opening. The round as the open / close cycle can be repeated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 15 rounds).

  In this embodiment, the special symbol indicating “3” is a normal jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating “7” is a probability variable jackpot symbol. As a variable display result in the special figure game, when the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal big hit is obtained, whereas when the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the probability change big hit as a predetermined special display result is obtained. When a probable jackpot is reached, after the jackpot gaming state based on the probable jackpot is finished, the probability variation continues as one of the special gaming states until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of special game is executed. A probability variation gaming state in which control (probability variation control) is performed is established. In this probability variable gaming state, the probability that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is improved as compared to the normal gaming state. Further, in the probability variation gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state in which the ease of winning the game ball to the start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6 is comparable to the normal gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state. The second winning game state in which the game ball can easily win a prize is included in the start winning opening. Note that the normal gaming state is a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state or the special gaming state, and the probability that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special figure game is the initial value immediately after the power is turned on. It is controlled in the same way as the setting state. Note that after the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot ends, the probability variation gaming state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started even before the special number game is executed a predetermined number of times. You may make it happen.

  In the second probability variation game state, for example, the variable display time in the normal diagram game by the normal symbol display device 20 is shorter than that in the normal game state, and the probability that the display result becomes a winning symbol in each normal diagram game is improved. To do. At this time, the tilting time of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 may be longer than that in the normal gaming state, and the number of tilts may be increased compared to that in the normal gaming state. In the first certain variation game state, the probability that the variable display result in the special game is a big hit is higher than that in the normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. In addition, in the second probability variation game state, in addition to the fact that the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game will be a big hit is higher than in the normal game state, it is easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening. It is more advantageous for the player than the state and the first probability variation gaming state. The probability variation jackpot includes a first probability variation jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the first probability variation gaming state, and a second probability variation jackpot in which the gaming state after the termination of the jackpot gaming state is the second probability variation gaming state. There is.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is a probable big hit, the special hit game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or next time. Until the control to the state is started, the time reduction state in which the time reduction control (time reduction control) is continuously performed may be set. In the time reduction state where the time reduction control is performed, the variable display time, which is the time from the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special game to the time when the fixed special symbol resulting in the display is stopped and displayed, is greater than the normal game state. Is also controlled to be shorter. Alternatively, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game has become the probability variable big hit, the variable display result in the special figure game is usually reduced while the time is reduced with the probability variable gaming state. After the big hit gaming state based on the big hit, the probable gaming state may not be entered, but the time may be reduced. Or, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is a probable big hit, the probable gaming state does not become the time shortening state but the variable in the special figure game After the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is usually a big hit, the time may be reduced instead of the probability variation gaming state.

  The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD or the like, and may be any device that performs screen display by a dot matrix method using a large number of pixels (pixels). On the display screen of the image display device 5, each can be identified by, for example, a variable display section as a display area divided into three corresponding to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. A variable display that displays various types of decorative designs in a variable manner is performed. As a specific example, variable display portions “left”, “middle”, and “right” are arranged on the image display device 5, and decorative symbols are variably displayed on the variable display portions. Then, when the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4 is started, the change of the decorative symbol (for example, the change of the symbol) is made on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5 When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 4, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 5 are started. By stopping the display of the decorative pattern that becomes the confirmed decorative pattern in each variable display section, the combination of the decorative pattern that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived display).

  In this embodiment, the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to either the first effect mode # 1 or the second effect mode # 2. In the first effect mode # 1 and the second effect mode # 2, the display mode of the effect image on the image display device 5, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The various performance operation modes are different. The selection of the first and second effect modes # 1 and # 2 is performed by, for example, a predetermined operation (for example, pressing down) of the operation switch 40 within a predetermined period in which a predetermined demonstration screen (demonstration screen) is displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The operation can be switched in response to the detected operation.

  For example, when the first effect mode # 1 is set, “1” is displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions provided on the display screen of the image display device 5. Symbols indicating Arabic numerals from "" to "8" are displayed in a variable manner. In contrast, when the second effect mode # 2 is set, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 are used. , “1” to “8” are displayed in a variable manner. A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the decorative symbols. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by displaying or deleting the symbols indicating the numbers in a predetermined order. As a specific example, when the first effect mode # 1 is set, symbols indicating numbers “1” to “8” are displayed in order, and the symbol indicating the number “8” is followed. Display a symbol indicating the number “1”. When the second effect mode # 2 is set, symbols indicating “1” to “8” are displayed in order, followed by “1” following the symbol indicating “8”. A symbol indicating the number is displayed.

  In the case where a big hit with a big hit symbol derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 occurs, the variable display results of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 include “left”, “middle”, The same decorative design is stopped and displayed on each “right” variable display section. Therefore, as a variable display result of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5, after the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit The game state will be controlled.

  In this embodiment, the numbers “1” to “8” or “1” to “8” that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols indicating, the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” or “1”, “three”, “5” and “seven” are changed. It is a decorative pattern (probable variation) for big hits. On the other hand, the symbols indicating the numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” or “two”, “four”, “six” and “eight” which are even numbers are usually used for jackpots. Decorative design (normal design).

  As a result of variable display of decorative symbols, at least one of the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect when the same probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the left, middle, and right variable display sections On the other hand, when the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the re-lottery, the probability variation big hit is made. In other words, the probability variation jackpot in this embodiment is not only the definite decoration symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decoration symbol, but also the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous reopening effect. This includes notifying that the gaming state is in the probability changing gaming state by, for example, stopping and displaying the probability variation symbol as a result of re-lottery in the lottery effect. On the other hand, the same normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions as variable display results on the decorative symbol, and then the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect described later. When a normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of re-lottery, a big hit is usually made. In other words, the normal big hit in this embodiment means that a definite decorative combination of a normal big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbols is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbols, and the probability variable re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect are also displayed. As a result of the re-lottery, a notification that the gaming state does not become the probable gaming state is performed by, for example, stopping and displaying the normal symbol.

  Among the probable symbols, the symbols indicating the numbers “1” and “5” or “1” and “5” are “left”, “middle”, and “right” as variable display results of the decorative symbols. The game after the end of the big hit gaming state by becoming the first probable big hit combination with the same design on the variable display part, or being stopped and displayed as the result of re-lottery in the probable re-draw lottery effect or the advantageous open re-lottery effect It is a 1st probability variation symbol which shows that the state became the 1st probability variation big hit which will be in the 1st probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, among the probability variation symbols, the symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” or “three” and “seven” are “left”, “middle”, and “right” as variable display results of the decorative symbols. The game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is changed to the second certainty by becoming a second probability variation big hit combination in which the same symbols are arranged in the variable display section or being stopped and displayed as a result of the re-lottery in the advantageous open re-lottery effect. It is the 2nd probability variation symbol which shows that it became the 2nd probability variation big hit which will be in a game state.

  Here, the probability variation re-lottery effect is based on the fact that the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and whether or not the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the probability varying gaming state. This is an effect operation for informing the re-lottery result. As a specific example, a predetermined timing during a period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the fixed decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol in the image display device 5. In such a case, a notification image indicating that the probability variation re-drawing effect is executed is displayed on the image display device 5. This notifies the player or the like that a re-lottery will be performed as to whether or not there is a rise in the gaming state to be a probabilistic gaming state even when the definite decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed. Subsequently, for example, a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5, for example, and after a predetermined period of time, a decorative symbol of a normal big hit combination or a decorative symbol of a probable big hit combination is derived and displayed. As a result, when the decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, the game state is changed to the probability variation gaming state by the display image on the image display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A notification effect is executed. On the other hand, when the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a notification effect that the game state has not been changed to the probability change game state is executed. In addition, when performing the re-lottery, after performing the effect display with a predetermined animation image, etc., it is not limited to the one that variably displays the final decorative combination of the normal jackpot combination derived and displayed as the variable display result, A normal symbol or a probability variation symbol may be stopped and displayed to notify whether or not there is a rise in the gaming state becoming a probability variation gaming state. Moreover, you may make it display the animation image etc. which alert | report whether the game state will be in a probability change game state, without depending on the display mode of a decoration symbol. For example, when the roulette game is started on the image display device 5 and the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters “odd number”, an image “probability !!” is displayed, and the gaming state becomes the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the thrown-in ball enters “even”, an image of “sorry !!” may be displayed to notify that the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the advantageous reopening lottery effect means that the game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is based on the fact that the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination or the decoration pattern of the first positive variation jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol. Is an effect operation for notifying the re-lottery result of whether or not the second probability variation gaming state is to be achieved. As a specific example, after the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination or the fixed decorative symbol of the first positive variable jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state. During the controlled period, for example, at a predetermined timing after the execution period of the probability variation re-lottery effect, a notification image indicating that the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed is displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, even if the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination or the fixed decorative symbol of the first certain variation jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a re-lottery is performed as to whether or not there is a rise in the gaming state becoming the second certain variation gaming state. Is notified to a player or the like. Subsequently, for example, a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5, for example, and after a predetermined period, a decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination, a decorative symbol of the first positive variation big hit combination, or a decorative symbol of the second positive variation big hit combination is derived. Display. As a result, when the decorative pattern of the second probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, the game state is changed to the second probability variation gaming state by the display image on the image display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A notification effect indicating that it has been broken is executed. On the other hand, when the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination or the decoration pattern of the first probability variation jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a notification effect that the game state has not been changed to the second probability variation gaming state has been executed. . In addition, when performing the re-lottery, not only the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination and the decorative symbol of the first positive variation jackpot combination derived and displayed as the variable display result are variably displayed again, but with a predetermined animation image. After performing the effect display or the like, the normal symbol, the first probability variation symbol, or the second probability variation symbol may be stopped and displayed to notify whether or not the gaming state has risen to the second probability variation gaming state. Moreover, you may make it display the animation image etc. which alert | report whether the game state will be in the 2nd probability change game state, without depending on the display mode of a decoration symbol. For example, when the roulette game is started on the image display device 5 and the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters “red”, an image “advantageous release !!” is displayed and the game state is the second probability change game. On the other hand, when the inserted ball enters the “blue” state, an image “normally released !!” is displayed to notify that the gaming state does not become the second probability variation gaming state. You may make it do.

  The image display device 5 is provided with a special symbol start memory display area for displaying the number of reserved memories (the number of special figure reserved memories) as the number of effective winning balls won in the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6. It may be. In the special symbol start memory display area, a winning display is performed in response to an effective start winning when the special figure reservation storage number is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). As a specific example, when 1 is added to the special figure reservation storage number, one of the display parts that is normally blue (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts that are blue) is displayed in red. Change. Further, when 1 is subtracted from the special figure reserved storage number, one of the display parts displayed in red (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part in red) is returned to blue display. Alternatively, in the special symbol start storage display area, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. Further, a display (special symbol start memory display) for displaying the number of special symbol hold memories may be provided separately from the special symbol start memory display area arranged in the display area of the image display device 5.

  The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is an electric tulip-type accessory (a normal tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces which are controlled to move between a vertical (normally open) position and a tilt (enlarged open) position by a solenoid 81 (FIG. 2). It has an electric accessory) and forms a start winning opening. The game ball that has entered the start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is detected by the start opening switch 22 (FIG. 2), and an execution condition (starting condition) for executing the special game based on the detection. ) Holds. Based on the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 22, a predetermined number (for example, four) of prize balls are paid out.

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes an opening / closing plate that opens and closes a large winning opening serving as a winning area by a solenoid 82 (FIG. 2). The opening / closing plate is in a state in which the big prize opening is closed at a normal time, for example, before the big hit gaming state occurs after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. On the other hand, when a big hit gaming state is achieved based on the variable display result in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, the big winning opening is opened by the solenoid 82 for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number of winning balls are generated. After closing. When a game ball enters the big prize opening opened by the opening / closing plate in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, a predetermined number is determined based on the detection of the gaming ball by the count switch 24 (FIG. 2). (For example, “15”) award balls are paid out. Of the game balls that were won at the grand prize opening and led to the back of the game board 2, those that entered one area (V winning area; special area) were detected by the V winning switch 23 (FIG. 2). A game ball that is later detected by the count switch 24 and enters the other area may be detected by the count switch 24 as it is. In this case, a solenoid for switching the route in the special winning opening may be provided on the back of the game board 2. Then, in each round other than the final round in the big hit gaming state, the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 23 may be a condition for shifting to the next round. Alternatively, without providing the V winning area, it is possible to always shift to the next round in each round other than the final round in the big hit gaming state.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill with a built-in lamp, an out port, and the like. Speakers 8L and 8R as sound effect generators for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, a game effect lamp 9 as an electric decoration member is provided in the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED included in the electric decoration member may be installed around each structure (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6 and the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. An operation switch 40 that is operated by a player or the like is provided at the lower left position of the gaming machine frame 3 in order to change the mode of effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like.

  Further, FIG. 1 shows a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as a card unit) that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enables ball lending according to the value specified from the recorded information of the inserted prepaid card. 70 is also shown. The card unit 70 includes a usable lamp indicating whether the card unit 70 is in a usable state, a connecting table direction indicator indicating whether the card unit 70 corresponds to the left or right pachinko gaming machine 1, and the card unit 70. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for opening the card unit 70 is provided. The card unit 70 may be installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a separate body from the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be integrated with the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a game ball corresponding to the amount of money may be lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a power supply board 10, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a payout control board 15, and a launch control board 17 as shown in FIG. Between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, a signal relay board 13 for relaying various control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is also provided. Further, the interface board 16 is interposed between the payout control board 15 and the card unit 70.

  The power supply board 10 is installed independently of each control board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 15, and generates a voltage used by each control board and mechanism component in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the power supply board 10 generates AC24V, VLP (DC + 24V), VSL (DC + 30V), VDD (DC + 12V), VCC (DC + 5V), and VBB (DC + 5V). The power supply board 10 includes, for example, a transformer circuit, a DC voltage generation circuit, and a power supply monitoring circuit. Further, the power supply substrate 10 may be provided with a clear switch that outputs a clear signal in response to a predetermined operation such as a pressing operation, or a capacitor that serves as a backup power supply. In addition, the power supply board 10 may be provided with a power switch for executing or shutting off power supply to each control board and the mechanical components in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the power switch may be provided outside the power supply board 10 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The transformer circuit included in the power supply substrate 10 is configured to include, for example, a transformer to which commercial power is applied to the input side (primary side), a varistor as an overvoltage protection circuit provided on the input side of the transformer, and the like. That's fine. Here, the transformer included in the transformer circuit may be any one that electrically insulates the commercial power supply from the inside of the power supply substrate 10. The transformer circuit generates 24V AC as its output voltage. The DC voltage generation circuit included in the power supply substrate 10 includes, for example, a rectifying / smoothing circuit that generates VSL by rectifying and boosting AC 24V using a rectifying element. VSL is used as a power supply voltage for driving the solenoid. Further, the DC voltage generation circuit includes a rectifier circuit that generates VLP by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier, for example. VLP is used as a power supply voltage for lighting the lamp. In addition, the DC voltage generation circuit includes a DC-DC converter that generates VDD and VCC based on VSL, for example. This DC-DC converter includes, for example, one or a plurality of switching regulators and a relatively large capacitor connected to the input side of the switching regulator, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is stopped. Sometimes, it may be configured so that the direct current voltage such as VSL, VDD, VBB, etc. decreases relatively slowly. The VDD is supplied to various switches for detecting game media such as the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, the V winning switch 23, and the count switch 24, and is used to operate these switches.

  The power supply monitoring circuit included in the power supply board 10 is configured by using, for example, a power failure monitoring reset module IC, and outputs a power-off signal when a drop in power supply voltage is detected. For example, in the power supply monitoring circuit, a period in which a predetermined voltage (VLP as an example) used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equal to or lower than a predetermined value (+20 V as an example) is longer than a predetermined time (56 milliseconds as an example). When it continues, it outputs a power-off signal. Alternatively, the power supply monitoring circuit may output a power-off signal immediately when a predetermined voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a predetermined value or less. The power-off signal may be an electrical signal that is turned on when it is at a low level, for example. The power-off signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit is amplified by, for example, an output driver circuit mounted on the power supply board 10 and then transmitted to the payout control board 15 via a predetermined connector or signal line. This power-off signal may be input to the main board 11 via the payout control board 15. The condition for detecting the stop of the supply of power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is not limited to the fact that the predetermined voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has become a predetermined value or less. Any condition can be used as long as it is possible to detect that has stopped. For example, the AC wave such as AC 24V may be monitored to detect that the AC wave has been interrupted, or a signal obtained by digitizing the AC wave may be monitored and the AC signal may be generated when the digital signal becomes flat. It may be a detection condition for the interruption.

  A main board 11 shown in FIG. 2 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is a sub-side mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12, a payout control board 15, and the like. A control board is provided with a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal to each control board, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Also, the main board 11 controls the special symbol display on the special symbol display device 4 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing of each segment constituting the special symbol display device 4, while the normal symbol display device 20 is turned on. By controlling the blinking / coloring control, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display device 20 is controlled. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 101 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 102 that outputs a drive signal for each of the solenoids 81 and 82 according to the command is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for receiving detection signals from the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, the V winning switch 23, and the count switch 24 is connected to the main board 11. Note that the gate switch 21, the start port switch 22, the V winning switch 23, and the count switch 24 have any configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. That's fine. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 to the solenoid 81 and opening / closing control of the opening / closing plate in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing the operation to the solenoid 82 is connected. Further, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the special symbol display device 4 and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal output from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the signal relay board 13. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 and prevents the signal from being input from the signal relay board 13 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the signal relay board 13 side to the main board 11 side.

  For example, the signal relay board 13 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Each transmission direction regulating circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulation circuit can prevent signals from being input from the effect control board 12 to the signal relay board 13 and pass signals only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In order to prevent unauthorized input of signals to the main board, a one-way data transfer means that restricts only the signal output from the main board to the sub board between the main board and the sub board has already been proposed. (See, for example, JP-A-8-224339). However, since there is nothing that regulates signal input to the main board between the main board and the one-way data transfer means, it is possible to input illegal signals to the main board by modifying the one-way data transfer means. Was possible. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing the circuit, it is possible to more reliably prevent an illegal signal input from the outside to the main board 11.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 is an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the leading bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 3 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3, the command 80XXh is a variable display start command transmitted when starting the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. XXh indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variable display start command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, different EXT data is set corresponding to the variable display pattern of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In addition, in the variable display start command, different EXT data is set in accordance with whether or not the probability variation re-lottery effect is executed even if the variable display pattern is the same. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of normal losing patterns are prepared as variable display patterns for deriving and displaying a definitive decorative symbol of a losing combination without the decorative symbol variable display mode becoming reach. A plurality of types of reach patterns are prepared as variable display patterns for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of a big hit combination or a lost combination after setting the variable display mode of the decorative design as reach.

  Here, the reach means that a decorative display (referred to as a reach variation pattern) that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative pattern derived and displayed by the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination is a variable display. It is a display mode that is being performed, or a display mode in which all or some of the decorative symbols are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol. Specifically, on the combination effective line that has not been stopped yet when the symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on some of the variable display portions on the predetermined combination effective line. Display mode in which variable display is performed in the variable display section (for example, “left”, “right” variable display sections among the “left”, “middle”, “right” variable display sections provided in the display area Is a display mode in which a variable display part of “medium” is still in a variable display state while a part of the jackpot symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “7”) is stopped and displayed, or A display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols on the variable display portion on the effective line are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, “left” provided in the display area) , Fluctuate in all of the “middle” and “right” variable display sections It shows a display manner in variable display is being performed manner which state is performed have all the same decoration pattern be displayed). In addition, during the reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps or sounds. This production is called reach production. Further, during the reach, the image display device 5 displays a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the decorative design), changes the display mode of the background, or changes the decorative design. The display mode may be changed. This change in character display, background display mode, and decorative pattern variation mode is referred to as reach effect display.

  A command 90XXh shown in FIG. 3 is a display result notification command indicating the type of variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols. In the display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the display result of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as the execution result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the probability variation re-lottery effect, or the advantageous open re-lottery effect is not reach. It is a normal loss that becomes a loss, a reach loss that becomes a loss after reaching reach, a normal jackpot where the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, or a first probability variable hit where the first probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed Different EXT data is set according to whether there is a second probability variation big hit where the second probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the display result notification command, when the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols is a big hit, different EXT data is set in accordance with whether or not the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed.

  The command A000h shown in FIG. 3 is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started when the jackpot is displayed in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 or the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5. It is. The command A1XXh is a jackpot round number notification command indicating the number of rounds started in the jackpot gaming state. The command B000h is a jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is ended.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is, for example, a payout control command transmitted as an electrical signal. The payout control command is set to transmit the payout control command by the CPU 114 (FIG. 7) provided in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and the game control micro computer is based on the setting. It is transmitted to the payout control board 15 by the serial communication circuit 118 (FIG. 7) provided in the computer 100. The transmission operation of the payout control command from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 includes a series of operations by the CPU 114 and the serial communication circuit 118 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. Also, for example, a payout notification command as an electrical signal is transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11. Note that the payout notification command is set so that the payout notification command is transmitted by the CPU 273 (FIG. 40) provided in the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15, and the payout control command is based on the setting. It is transmitted to the main board 11 by the serial communication circuit 277 (FIG. 40) provided in the microcomputer 150. The transmission operation of the payout notification command from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 includes a series of operations by the CPU 273 and the serial communication circuit 277 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150. Further, not only a predetermined operation command from one of the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 to the other but also a notification signal for notifying the other of the operation state of the other is included in the payout control command and the payout notification command. And

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of commands transmitted / received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 15. As shown in FIG. 6A, the payout control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 and the payout notification command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 are both. It is configured to be 2 bytes, and is configured to be the second byte by inverting the first byte. Then, the first bit (7th bit [bit 7]) of each byte is used as a header, and the header is made different so that the first byte and the second byte can be distinguished. For example, the header in the first byte is set to a fixed value of “0”, while the header in the second byte is set to a fixed value of “1”.

  The payout control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 includes a payout number designation command and an ACK feedback command. The payout number designation command is a command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out, and is composed of, for example, a bit value as shown in FIG. Here, the 3rd to 0th bits [bits 3-0] of the first byte and the second byte in the payout number designation command may be values set according to the number of prize balls to be paid out. FIG. 6C shows the payout number designation command used in this embodiment in hexadecimal notation. The command E11Eh shown in FIG. 6C is a first payout number designation command indicating that the number of prize balls to be paid out is 15. The command EC13h is a second payout number designation command indicating that the number of prize balls to be paid out is four. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 22, four prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 24, 15 prize balls are paid out. The command F00Fh shown in FIG. 6C is an ACK feedback command serving as a reception confirmation acceptance signal indicating that the prize ball ACK command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 is received on the main board 11 side. It is.

  Here, the payout motor 50 that performs a rotation operation for paying out the game ball in accordance with the payout control of the payout control board 15 is included, for example, in a payout device provided inside a predetermined payout case. In the upper part of the payout case, a hole communicating with the ball passage is provided, and the game ball flows into the payout case through the hole. In addition, a cam having a ball mounting portion, a ball passage below the cam, and the like are provided inside the payout case. The game balls that have flowed into the payout case fall one by one through the ball passages 90 each time the ball mounting portion of the cam rotates 1/3. Furthermore, a payout motor position sensor composed of, for example, a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element is provided inside the payout case. The payout motor position sensor is a sensor for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 50, and is used for detecting the ball engagement due to the inability to rotate the cam. At the lower part of the ball passage provided inside the payout case, for example, a payout count switch by a proximity switch is arranged. The payout count switch is turned on every time one game ball falls from the ball passage, and transmits a predetermined detection signal to the payout control board 15.

  FIG. 6D is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a payout notification command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11. The payout notification command includes a prize ball ACK command, a payout error notification command, and a payout error cancel command. The command A0F5h shown in FIG. 6D is a prize ball ACK that is a reception confirmation signal indicating that the payout number specifying command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is received on the payout control board 15 side. It is a command. The command B0F4h is a payout error notification command for notifying the main board 11 that an abnormality relating to the payout of game balls has occurred on the payout control board 15 side. The command B1E4h is a payout error cancel command for notifying the main substrate 11 side that the error generated on the payout control board 15 side has been cancelled.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. A game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a clock circuit 111, a reset / interrupt controller 112, a random number circuit 113, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 114, and a ROM (Read Only). Memory (RAM) 115, RAM (Random Access Memory) 116, timer circuit (PIT) 117, serial communication circuit (SCI) 118, and input / output port 119.

  The clock circuit 111 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit in the game control microcomputer 100 such as the CPU 114. As a specific example, the clock circuit 111 divides an external clock input to a predetermined clock input terminal by 4 to generate an internal system clock CLK, and the generated internal system clock CLK is used for a game control micro, such as the CPU 114. This is supplied to each circuit in the computer 100.

  The reset / interrupt controller 112 is for controlling various reset and interrupt requests generated in the game control microcomputer 100. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 112 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to a predetermined SRST terminal for a certain period. A user reset has occurred when a low-level signal is input to a predetermined URST terminal for a certain period of time, a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal is generated, or an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) signal is generated. Or a reset caused by a predetermined factor such as the occurrence of an interval reset signal.

  The interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 112 include four types of interrupts such as an X class interrupt (XIRQ), an I class interrupt (IRQ), a software interrupt (SWI), and an illegal opcode trap (ILGOP). . The X class interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when a low level signal is input to a predetermined XIRQ terminal for a certain period. The I class interrupt is an interrupt that can allow / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a user program, and a low level signal is input to a predetermined IRQ terminal for a certain period of time, or an interrupt request signal from the timer circuit 117 is received. This is an interrupt generated by various predetermined interrupt factors, such as the occurrence of an interrupt request signal from the serial communication circuit 118.

  The random number circuit 113 is a circuit that generates all or part of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers used on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for jackpot determination, a random value MR2 for normal hit determination, a random value MR3 for variable display pattern determination, a game state determination Random number value MR4, random number value MR5 for execution of probability variation re-lottery effect execution, and random value MR6 for determination of advantageous open re-lottery effect execution are used, and control is performed so that numerical data indicating these random number values can be counted. Is done. In order to enhance the gaming effect, random numbers other than these may be used on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by the random number circuit 113. Further, the numerical data indicating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating by software using the random counter different from the random number circuit 113 by the CPU 114.

  The jackpot determination random number MR1 is a random number used for determining whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the jackpot gaming state due to the occurrence of the jackpot, and is, for example, in the range of “1” to “65535”. Takes a value. That is, the jackpot determination random number MR1 is used to determine whether the type of variable display result in the special figure game is a big hit or a loss. The random number MR2 for determining the normal hit is a random value used for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is “win”. For example, “1” to “1” 14 ".

  The random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern is a random number value for display used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “256” is taken. The random number value MR4 for determining the gaming state is determined as a normal gaming state, a first probability variation gaming state, a second gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends when it is determined that the big winning game is made in the special figure game. This is a random value used for determining which of the probable gaming state to control, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “60”, for example. That is, the random value MR4 for determining the game state is used to determine whether the type of the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is the normal jackpot, the first probability variation jackpot, or the second probability variation jackpot. It is done.

  The random value MR5 for determining whether or not the probability variation re-drawing effect is executed is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the probability variation re-drawing effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example. . The random value MR6 for determining whether to execute the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the advantageous opening re-lottery effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 113. FIG. 9 also shows the start port switch 22 and the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 9, the random number circuit 113 includes a clock signal output circuit 171, an initial value setting circuit 172, a random number generation circuit 173, a timer circuit 174, a latch signal generation circuit 175, and a random value register 176. I have.

  The clock signal output circuit 171 inputs, for example, the internal system clock CLK supplied from the clock circuit 111 included in the game control microcomputer 100 as a reference clock, and receives a clock signal having the same cycle as the reference clock or a reference clock for 16 minutes. The rounded clock signal is output as a random number generating clock signal S1. The clock signal output circuit 171 outputs a clock signal S2 having the same cycle as that of the clock signal S1 but having a different phase. For example, the clock signal output circuit 171 may generate the clock signal S2 having a rising timing and a falling timing different in the same cycle as the clock signal S1 by inputting the clock signal S1 to the delay circuit or the inverting circuit. The clock signal S1 output from the clock signal output circuit 171 is input to the clock terminal of the random number generation circuit 173 and used as a count clock signal. The clock signal S2 output from the clock signal output circuit 171 is input to the clock terminal of the latch signal generation circuit 175 and used as a latch clock signal.

  The clock signal output circuit 171 inputs a signal obtained by multiplying the reference clock by two to the clock terminal of the D-type flip-flop circuit, for example, when generating the clock signal S1 having the same cycle as the reference clock, and outputs a negative phase output terminal. By connecting the output signal from the (inverted output terminal) to the D input terminal, the clock signal S1 is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal), while the clock signal is output from the reverse phase output terminal (inverted output terminal). S2 may be output. In this case, the clock signal S1 having the same frequency as the reference clock is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) of the D-type flip-flop circuit, while the clock signal S1 is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal). Thus, a clock signal S2 having the same frequency as that of the clock signal S1 and a phase different from the clock signal S1 by π (= 180 °) is output.

  The initial value setting circuit 172 sets the initial value for the first round when the random number circuit 113 starts generating random numbers after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the random number generation circuit 173 has a predetermined value. When the numerical data is updated cyclically from the initial value to a predetermined final value, a new initial value is set. The initial value setting circuit 172 outputs an initial value setting signal SK indicating the set initial value and inputs it to the random number generation circuit 173.

  The random number generation circuit 173 responds to, for example, the rising edge of the clock signal S1 supplied from the clock signal output circuit 171 and outputs the count value C to be output from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value in a predetermined order. Update cyclically according to. As a specific example, the random number generation circuit 173 is configured using a 16-bit binary counter, and is an initial value set in a range from “0” to “65535” in response to the rising edge of the clock signal S1. The count value C is incremented by 1 from the value to “65535”. Then, after counting up to “65535”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that is one final value smaller than the initial value.

  The random number generation circuit 173 may change the permutation that is the update order of the count value C when the count value C is cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, for example. As a specific example, the random number generation circuit 173 is a counter that counts up one by one from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value within a range from “1” to “65535” in response to the rising edge of the clock signal S1. And a random number sequence changing circuit that can change the numerical data output from the counter to a permutation according to a predetermined update rule, and the random number sequence changing circuit replaces or transposes bits in the numerical data output from the counter By executing this bit scrambling process, the permutation that is the update order of the count value C may be arbitrarily set.

  The timer circuit 174 measures the time during which the on-time start winning signal SS1 is input from the start port switch 22, and when the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 milliseconds), the start winning signal SS1. Is input to the latch signal generation circuit 175. For example, the timer circuit 174 is configured using an up counter or a down counter, and starts in response to the start winning signal SS1 being turned on. In this case, the timer circuit 174 counts up a predetermined timer value in response to, for example, the rising edge of the internal system clock CLK input from the clock circuit 111 during the period in which the start winning signal SS1 is in the ON state. By counting down or the like, the time during which the start winning signal SS1 is on is measured. When the timer value counted up or down reaches a value corresponding to 3 milliseconds, the output signal to the latch signal generation circuit 175 is turned on to output the start winning signal SS1.

  The latch signal generation circuit 175 is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop circuit. As a specific example, the wiring from the output terminal of the timer circuit 174 is connected to the D input terminal of the D-type flip-flop circuit constituting the latch signal generation circuit 175, and the clock signal output from the clock signal output circuit 171 is connected to the clock terminal. A wiring for transmitting the signal S2 may be connected. The latch signal generation circuit 175 generates the latch signal SL by outputting the start winning signal SS1 output from the timer circuit 174 in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal S2 output from the clock signal output circuit 171. , Input to the random value register 176.

  The random value register 176 is configured using, for example, a 16-bit register, and stores the count value C output from the random number generation circuit 173 as numerical data indicating various random values such as a random number MR1 for determining a big hit. To do. More specifically, the random number value register 176, in response to the rising edge of the latch signal SL input from the latch signal generation circuit 175, changes the count value C input from the random number generation circuit 173 to the jackpot determination disturbance. By latching and storing the value as the numerical value MR1, each time the start winning signal SS1 from the start port switch 22 is input to the random number circuit 113, the stored random number MR1 for jackpot determination is updated. The random value register 176 is in a non-readable (disabled) state when the output control signal SC from the game control microcomputer 100 is off, and is readable (enabled) when the output control signal SC is on. ) State. In addition, when the output control signal SC is on, the random value register 176 becomes incapable of receiving the latch signal SL, and the stored data remains even when the latch signal SL input from the latch signal generation circuit 175 rises. It may not be updated.

  The CPU 114 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 reads the user program and data stored in the ROM 115 and uses the RAM 116 as a work area to perform a control operation according to the program. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the area having addresses 0000h to 01FFh is a work area assigned to the RAM 116. An area with addresses 1000h to 101Ch is a built-in register area assigned to a built-in register included in the random number circuit 113, the timer circuit 117, the serial communication circuit 118, and the like. The area of addresses 2000h to 200Fh is a chip select signal decoding area assigned to an address decoder built in the game control microcomputer 100. An area having addresses E000h to FFFFh is allocated to the ROM 115, and includes a user program management area and a user program / data area.

  A user program or user data created in advance by the user is stored in the user program / data area in the ROM 115 where the addresses are E080h to FFFFh. In the user program management area in which the address in the ROM 115 is E000h to E07Fh, user program management data used when the CPU 114 executes the user program and sets the operation content of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. .

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an address map in the user program management area shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, a predetermined microcomputer such as an ID number, which is unique identification information assigned to each game control microcomputer 100, is included in the area E00Ah to E011h included in the user program management area. Eigenvalues are stored.

  In the area where the address included in the user program management area is E01Bh, among the plurality of types of I class interrupt (IRQ) generated in the game control microcomputer 100, the one having the highest priority is set. Data indicating the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) is stored. For example, in the default state in which the highest priority interrupt setting data is not set in the area of the address E01Bh, the interrupt factor due to the signal input to the IRQ terminal provided in the reset / interrupt controller 112 has the highest priority, and the timer circuit 117 The priority of interrupt requests from each channel (CH0 to CH3) is high, and the priority is set to be low in the order of error interrupt request, reception interrupt request, and transmission interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118. That is, even in the default state, among the interrupt requests from the serial communication circuit 118, the error interrupt request has a higher priority than other interrupt factors such as a reception interrupt request and a transmission interrupt request. Therefore, interrupt processing based on an error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118 is executed with priority over interrupt processing based on a reception interrupt request or transmission interrupt request that is different from the error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118. Will be.

  Corresponding to the highest priority interrupt setting data set in the area whose address is E01Bh, the priority order of the factors of the plurality of types of I class interrupts (IRQ) is changed from the default setting. For example, when “05h” is set as the highest-priority interrupt setting data, the priority of the error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118 is determined by the interrupt factor due to the signal input to the IRQ terminal or the interrupt request from the timer circuit 117. The priority is the highest among the plurality of types of I class interrupt (IRQ) factors generated in the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the area of the address E01Ch shown in FIG. 11, data indicating random number initial setting (KRSS) used for initial setting of the random number circuit 113 is stored. The random number initial setting data is configured as 8-bit data, for example. This random number initial setting data includes the update period of the random number value generated by the random number circuit 113, the start value at the start that becomes the start value of the first round in the random number value, the start value after the second round in the random number value, and the random value It includes a bit indicating the initial setting contents of a random value, such as a method for changing a random number sequence (permutation).

  In the area of the address E022h and the area E023h shown in FIG. 11, data indicating the first serial communication initial setting (KSCM1) used for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 118, and the second serial communication Data indicating the initial setting (KSCM2) is stored. The first and second serial communication initial setting data are each configured as 8-bit data. For example, the first serial communication initial setting data uses whether or not to use an interrupt when the transmission data is empty, whether or not to use an interrupt when transmission is completed, and an interrupt when receiving data is transferred Whether to use an interrupt at the time of detecting an idle line, whether to use the transmission operation unit 302 (FIG. 21) of the serial communication circuit 118, and the reception operation of the serial communication circuit 118 It includes a bit indicating initial setting contents related to serial communication control such as setting whether to use the unit 301 (FIG. 21). In addition, the second serial communication initial setting data sets whether to use an interrupt at the time of an overrun error, whether to use an interrupt at the time of a noise error, whether to use an interrupt at the time of a framing error It includes a bit indicating initial setting contents related to serial communication control, such as setting of whether or not to use an interrupt at the time of parity error.

  Here, an interrupt at the time of an overrun error occurs when the reception shift register provided in the reception operation unit 301 receives the next data before the reception data in the serial communication circuit 118 is read by the user program. It is an interrupt based on the error to be performed. The interruption at the time of noise error is an interruption based on an error that occurs when noise of data received by the serial communication circuit 118 is detected. The interrupt at the time of a framing error is an interrupt based on an error that occurs when “0” is detected in the stop bit of the data received by the serial communication circuit 118. The interrupt at the time of a parity error is an interrupt based on an error that occurs when the parity of the data received by the serial communication circuit 118 does not match the parity bit in the received data. As described above, the error interrupt generated in the serial communication circuit 118 includes four types of interrupts, that is, an interrupt at a parity error, an interrupt at an overrun error, an interrupt at a framing error, and an interrupt at a noise error. It is included.

  In addition to the game control user program, the ROM 115 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 115 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 114 to perform various determinations and determinations. As a determination table, a big hit determination table referred to for determining whether or not a variable display result is a big hit with a confirmed special symbol in a special figure game as a big hit symbol, or a display result in a normal figure game is set to “win”. Ordinary hit determination table referred to for determining whether or not, re-lottery execution determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect, special symbols and decorations Reach determination table referenced to determine whether or not the decorative symbol variable display mode is to be reached when the symbol variable display result is lost, a probability change fall that determines whether or not to end the probability change gaming state A probability variation end determination table and the like referred to for lottery are included.

  As a specific example of the big hit determination table, in this embodiment, a normal big hit determination table 181 shown in FIG. 12A and a probability change big hit determination table 182 shown in FIG. Yes. In the normal big hit determination table 181 and the probability change big hit determination table 182, whether the big hit determination random number MR1 matches the big hit determination value data indicating that the display result of the special figure game is a big hit, or the special figure game. It is composed of setting data or the like that makes it possible to determine whether the display result matches the loss determination value data indicating that it is lost. In the probability change big hit determination table 182, more random number values MR <b> 1 are set to match the big hit determination value data than in the normal big hit determination table 181. That is, in the probability changing gaming state, the display result of the special figure game is determined using the probability changing big hit determination table 182, so that the display result of the special figure game is determined using the normal time big hit determination table 181. A determination that a big hit will be made is made with a higher probability.

  In this embodiment, in the normal jackpot determination table 181 shown in FIG. 12A, “2001” to “2218” of “1” to “65535” that are the range of values that the random value MR1 for jackpot determination takes. Is set to be determined to match with the big hit determination value data indicating that “is a big hit”. On the other hand, in the probability change big hit determination table 182 shown in FIG. 12 (B), “2001” to “3308” among “1” to “65535” that are the range of values of the random value MR1 for big hit determination. Is set so as to be determined to match with the big hit determination value data indicating that it is “big hit”.

  As a specific example of the normal hit determination table, in this embodiment, the normal open normal hit determination table 183 shown in FIG. 13A and the advantageous open normal hit determination table 184 shown in FIG. Stored in the ROM 115. Each of the normal opening determination normal hit determination table 183 and the advantageous opening normal hit determination table 184 includes normal hit determination value data indicating that the normal hit determination random number MR2 indicates that the display result of the normal game is “winning”. Or setting data that makes it possible to determine whether or not the display result of the normal game is “lost”. In the advantageous opening normal hit determination table 184, more random number values MR2 are set to match the normal hit determination value data than in the normal open normal hit determination table 183. In this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the normal gaming state or the first probability variable gaming state, the normal opening game normal hit determination table 183 is used to determine the display result of the normal game. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in the second probability variation gaming state, the display result of the normal game is determined using the advantageous opening normal hit determination table 184. As a result, in the second probability variation gaming state, the display result of the normal game is “winning” with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state and the first probability variation gaming state, and the game ball is likely to win the start winning opening.

  As a specific example of the re-lottery execution determination table, in this embodiment, a probability variation re-lottery execution determination table 185 shown in FIG. 14A and an advantageous release re-lottery execution determination table 186 shown in FIG. Stored in the ROM 115. The probability variation re-lottery execution determination table 185 indicates that the random number MR5 for determining the probability variation re-lottery effect coincides with the effect execution determination value data indicating that the probability variation re-lottery effect is executed, or does not execute the probability variation re-lottery effect. It is comprised from the setting data etc. which make it possible to determine whether it corresponds with the determination value data without effect. The advantageous release re-lottery execution determination table 186 indicates that the random number MR6 for determining the advantageous release re-lottery effect matches the effect execution determination value data indicating that the advantageous release re-lottery effect is executed, or the advantageous release re-lottery effect. It is configured from setting data or the like that makes it possible to determine whether or not it matches with the no-effect determination value data indicating that the operation is not executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 115, a fixed special symbol determination table for determining a fixed special symbol to be derived and displayed as a variable display result in a special symbol game, or a variable display pattern of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is determined. A variable display pattern determination table, a gaming state determination table for determining a gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like.

  The variable display pattern determination table stored in the ROM 115 associates each variable display pattern with a random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern, for example, so that the variable display pattern is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern. What is necessary is just to be comprised from the selection data etc. which enable selection. The data indicating each variable display pattern in the variable display pattern determination table is, for example, in the variable display pattern determination table or in a variable display pattern setting table different from the variable display pattern determination table. It is associated with data indicating the total variable display time, control data set as EXT data by a variable display start command, and the like.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of a variable display pattern table 187 as an example of a variable display pattern setting table. The variable display pattern table 187 includes, for example, setting data that associates a plurality of types of variable display patterns with control data set as EXT data of a variable display start command. In this embodiment, variable display patterns A (reach) to J (reach) are prepared as variable display patterns to be reach patterns. In addition, variable display patterns K (normally lost) to N (normally lost) are prepared as variable display patterns that become normal loss patterns.

  As a specific example of the variable display pattern determination table, in this embodiment, the big hit pattern determination table 188 shown in FIG. 16A, the reach-losing pattern determination table 189 shown in FIG. A normal loss pattern determination table 190 shown in (C) and a probability changing pattern determination table 191 shown in FIG. 16 (D) are stored in the ROM 115.

  The big hit pattern determination table 188 shown in FIG. 16A shows one of a plurality of types of reach patterns based on the random display value MR3 for variable display pattern determination when the variable display result of the decorative design is a big hit. It is configured so that selection can be made. In the reach-losing pattern determination table 189 shown in FIG. 16B, when the decorative display variable display result is reach-losing, any one of a plurality of types of reach patterns is selected based on the random display value MR3 for variable display pattern determination. It is configured so that selection can be made. The normal lose pattern determination table 190 shown in FIG. 16C has a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern when the variable display result of the decorative design in the normal gaming state is set as the normal lose. Normally, any one of the loss patterns can be selected and determined. In the probability changing pattern determination table 191 shown in FIG. 16D, there are a plurality of types of normal patterns based on the random display value MR3 for determining the variable display pattern when the variable display result of the decorative symbol in the probability changing gaming state is set as normal loss. One of the loss patterns can be selected and determined.

  Here, when the big hit pattern determination table 188 and the reach lose pattern determination table 189 are compared, the allocation of the random display pattern MR3 for determining the variable display pattern for each variable display pattern (reach type) is different. That is, the ratio of the reach type selected differs depending on whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is lost or a big hit. As a result, the probability that the display result is a big hit will vary depending on the type of reach that appears during variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As described above, the probability that the display result determined for each reach type is a big hit is also referred to as a reach big hit reliability or simply a reach reliability.

  As a specific example of the gaming state determination table, in this embodiment, the normal state gaming state determination table 192 shown in FIG. 17A, the first probability change gaming state determination table 193 shown in FIG. A second probability change gaming state determination table 194 shown in 17 (C) is stored in the ROM 115. Each of the gaming state determination tables 192 to 194 indicates that the random number MR4 for determining the gaming state matches the normal gaming state determination value data indicating that the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state, or the gaming state is changed to the first certain change game. It is possible to determine whether it matches the first probability variation gaming state determination value data indicating that the state is controlled or whether it matches the second probability variation gaming state determination value data indicating that the gaming state is controlled to the second probability variation gaming state It consists of setting data to make.

  In the normal game state determination table 192 shown in FIG. 17A, “1” to “48” are the normal game state determination value data and “49” to “57” are the random number value MR4 for determining the game state. The determination data is set so that “58” to “60” respectively match the second probability variation gaming state determination value data and the second probability variation gaming state determination value data. On the other hand, in the first probability variation gaming state determination table 193 shown in FIG. 17B, among the random number values MR4 for determining the gaming state, “1” to “36” are the normal gaming state determination value data. The determination data is set so that “37” to “54” match the first probability variation gaming state determination value data, and “55” to “60” respectively match the second probability variation gaming state determination value data. In addition, in the second probability variation gaming state determination table 194 shown in FIG. 17C, “1” to “20” among the random value MR4 for determining the gaming state are the normal gaming state determination value data and “21” to The determination data is set so that “50” matches the first probability variation gaming state determination value data, and “51” to “60” match the second probability variation gaming state determination value data.

  When it is determined that the display result of the special game is a big hit when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state determination table 192 shown in FIG. The gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined with reference to Further, when it is determined that the display result of the special figure game is a big hit when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first certain variation gaming state, the first certain variation time shown in FIG. With reference to the gaming state determination table 193, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined. Further, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second probability variation game state, and it is determined that the display result of the special figure game is a big hit, the second probability variation time shown in FIG. With reference to the gaming state determination table 194, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is determined. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is determined according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is determined that the display result of the special game is a big hit. C) is determined at any one of the normal gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state, and the second probability variation gaming state at a decision rate as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (A), when it is determined that the display result of the special game is a big hit when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the big hit gaming state is ended. The subsequent gaming state is determined to be a normal gaming state at a decision rate of 4/5, to a first probability variation gaming state at a proportion of 3/20, and to a second probability variation gaming state at a proportion of 1/20. It will be. As shown in FIG. 18 (B), when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first probability variation game state, when it is determined that the display result of the special figure game is a big hit, The gaming state after the end of the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state at a decision rate of 3/5, to the first probability variation gaming state at a decision rate of 3/10, to the second probability variation gaming state at a decision rate of 1/10. Each will be decided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18 (C), when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second probability variation game state, when it is determined that the display result of the special figure game is a big hit, The gaming state after the end of the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state at a decision rate of 1/3, the first probability variation gaming state at a decision rate of 1/6, and the second probability variation gaming state at a decision rate of 1/2. Each will be decided. Thus, in this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state, or the second probability variation gaming state. The rate at which it is determined to control the gaming state in the normal gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state, and the second probability variation gaming state is different.

  In the RAM 116 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the gaming state and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. A data holding area 160 is provided. The game control data holding area 160 shown in FIG. 19 includes a special figure holding storage unit 161A, a normal figure holding storage unit 161B, a confirmed special symbol storage unit 162, a game control flag setting unit 163, and a game control timer setting unit. 164, a game control counter setting unit 165, and a game control buffer setting unit 166.

  The special figure holding storage unit 161A has an execution condition for executing the special figure game by the special symbol display device 4 when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 Storing information related to the special figure game in which the start condition for starting the variable display is not satisfied due to the reason that the conventional special figure game is being executed or the like is stored. For example, the special figure hold storage unit 161A associates with the hold numbers in the order of winning to the start winning opening, and the random number MR1 for jackpot determination extracted from the random number circuit 113 or the like by the CPU 114 based on the establishment of the execution condition by the winning. Is stored as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  Although the execution condition for the normal symbol display device 20 to execute the normal figure game is satisfied when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area, the normal figure hold storage unit 161B has established the conventional normal figure game. The hold information regarding the normal diagram game in which the start condition for starting variable display is not satisfied due to reasons such as being executed is stored. For example, the normal diagram hold storage unit 161B associates the hold numbers with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and the normal hit determination extracted from the random number circuit 113 or the like by the CPU 114 based on the establishment of the execution condition by the passage. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 is stored as pending data and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The confirmed special symbol storage unit 162 stores data indicating a confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. The game control flag setting unit 163 is data for setting a plurality of types of flags that are set or cleared in accordance with the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, signals transmitted from various switches via the switch circuit 101, and the like. Remember. The game control timer setting unit 164 stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values used for game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control counter setting unit 165 stores data indicating a plurality of types of count values used for game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control buffer setting unit 166 temporarily stores various data used for game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The circuit used for flag setting and counter / timer may be configured by a register circuit provided separately from the RAM 116.

  The game control flag setting unit 163 includes, for example, a main backup flag, a serial communication error flag, a special symbol process flag, a normal symbol process flag, a big hit flag, a normal hit flag, a probability variation confirmation flag, an advantageous release certain flag, a certain probability variation flag, An open flag, a reach flag, an open / close setting completion flag, and the like are provided.

  The main backup flag indicates whether or not a predetermined memory protection process has been executed by the gaming control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. For example, when “55H” is set as the value of the main backup flag, backup is present (ON state), while when a value other than “55H” is set, backup is not present (OFF state). The serial communication error flag indicates that an error has occurred in the communication operation in the serial communication circuit 118. For example, the serial communication error flag is set to an on state in response to an error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118.

  The special symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected and executed in the special symbol process (step S48 in FIG. 44, FIG. 45) executed corresponding to the special symbol display device 4. The normal symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected and executed in the normal symbol process (step S49 in FIG. 44, FIG. 53) executed corresponding to the normal symbol display device 20.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is a big hit when the special symbol display device 4 starts the special figure game. Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off. The normal hit flag is set to the on state when it is determined that the display result in the normal figure game is “hit” when the normal figure game is started by the normal symbol display device 20. Then, when the tilting control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is completed based on the display result in the normal game being “winning”, the normal winning flag is cleared and turned off.

  The probability variation confirmation flag is set to the on state when it is determined that the variable display result in the special symbol game is to be a big hit when the special symbol display device 4 starts the special symbol game. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability variation confirmation flag is cleared and turned off. The advantageous release determination flag is set to the on state when it is determined that the second probability variation big hit is made out of the probability variation big hits when the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 is started. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the advantageous release determination flag is cleared and turned off.

  The probability change flag is set to ON when the big hit gaming state ends after the big hit gaming state is controlled after being controlled to the big hit gaming state by a big hit in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. Correspondingly, it is set to the on state. On the other hand, the flag during probability change indicates that, for example, when the special figure game is started, it is determined that the probability variation game state is to be ended by the probability variation falling lottery, or the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability variation game state is a predetermined number of times ( For example, when the probable gaming state is ended due to the fact that the game has reached 100 times) or the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit has ended, the game is cleared and turned off. The advantageous release flag is turned on when the big hit gaming state ends after the big hit gaming state is controlled after being controlled to the big hit gaming state by winning a special bonus game in the special symbol display device 4 Corresponding to, the ON state is set. On the other hand, the advantageous release flag is cleared and turned off when the second probability variation gaming state ends.

  In this embodiment, the probability changing flag and the advantageous release flag are set according to whether the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state, the first probability changing gaming state, or the second probability changing gaming state. Is set. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the setting of the probability changing flag and the advantageous release flag according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, both the probability changing flag and the advantageous release flag are set to the off state. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the first probability variation gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to the on state while the advantageous release flag is set to the off state. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the second probability variation gaming state, both the probability variation flag and the advantageous release flag are set to the on state.

  The reach flag is set to the on state in response to the determination that the reach is lost when the type of the variable display result in the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, the reach flag is cleared and turned off, for example, when a variable display pattern corresponding to reach loss is determined. The opening / closing setting completion flag has been set for tilt control of the movable wing piece included in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 based on the display result “winning” in the normal game by the normal symbol display device 20. Correspondingly, the ON state is set. On the other hand, the opening / closing setting completion flag is cleared and turned off in response to the end of the tilt control of the movable blade piece provided in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6.

  The game control timer setting unit 164 includes, for example, a variable display timer that measures on the main board 11 the variable display time (total variable display time) of a special symbol that is the execution time of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. Is provided. For example, the variable display timer is used as a down counter that stores a timer value corresponding to the remaining variable display time of a special symbol in a special game and periodically counts down the timer value. In this case, the variable display timer is set with a timer initial value corresponding to the type of display result and the variable display pattern determined when the special symbol display device 4 starts variable display of the special symbol.

  The game control counter setting unit 165 is provided with, for example, a payout control command transmission counter and a probability variation counter. The payout control command transmission counter is used to count the number of commands waiting to be sent to the payout control board 15 so as to be specified. The probability variation counter is for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state in which probability variation control is performed. In the probability variation counter, the upper limit number of times of the special figure game (for example, “100”) that is predetermined to be executable in the probability variation gaming state when the big hit gaming state due to the probability variation big hit in the special figure game ends. Is set as the initial value of the variable display count during probability change. Then, when a special game in which the variable display result is lost in the probability variation gaming state is executed, the count value in the probability variation counter is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted). Further, the game control counter setting unit 165 counts a special figure reserved memory number counter that counts the number of reserved data that is the number of reserved data based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6. And a normal figure reserved memory number counter that counts the number of normal figure reserved memories, which is the number of reserved data based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41.

  The game control buffer setting unit 166 is provided with, for example, a main checksum buffer, a reception command buffer, a transmission command buffer, and the like. The main checksum buffer is for storing a checksum calculated using stored data in a specific area of the RAM 116 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped.

  The reception command buffer is used for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-side control board by the main board 11. This reception command buffer includes a payout reception command buffer. The payout reception command buffer is for temporarily storing a command received from the payout control board 15. For example, the payout reception command buffer only needs to include 12 reception command buffers # 1 to # 12. Each reception command buffer # 1 to # 12 is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and a plurality of reception command buffers can be used as a ring buffer to store six reception commands of 2 bytes. .

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store a command to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the sub control board. This transmission command buffer includes a payout transmission command buffer, an effect transmission command buffer, and the like. The payout transmission command buffer is for temporarily storing a command to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15. For example, the payout transmission command buffer includes twelve transmission command buffers # 1 to # 12, and the command buffer that stores a command waiting for transmission from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 has payout control. It is specified by the command transmission counter. Each of the transmission command buffers # 1 to # 12 is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and can store six transmission commands of 2 bytes by using a plurality of transmission command buffers as ring buffers. . The effect transmission command buffer is for temporarily storing a command to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  The timer circuit 117 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 is configured by, for example, four channels (CH0 to CH3) of 8-bit programmable counters, and is capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. is there. For example, the timer circuit 117 starts counting down at a predetermined cycle from a preset count value for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value is “00”, the interrupt flag corresponding to that channel is turned on. set. At this time, if the interrupt is permitted, the timer circuit 117 generates an interrupt request to the CPU 114.

  The serial communication circuit 118 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that handles communication data in, for example, full-duplex, asynchronous, standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format, and has a configuration illustrated in FIG. ing. The serial communication circuit 118 illustrated in FIG. 21 includes a reception operation unit 301, a transmission operation unit 302, a serial communication data register 303, a serial status register 304, and a serial control register 305.

  The reception operation unit 301 can sample and acquire the reception data transmitted by serial communication and transfer the acquired reception data to the serial communication data register 303 by the reception operation based on the setting in the predetermined bit of the serial control register 305. And Further, the reception operation unit 301 sets a predetermined bit of the serial status register 304 to “0” or “1” according to an operation state in the reception operation. The reception operation unit 301 is, for example, a reception shift register that stores reception data sequentially transmitted by serial communication while shifting, a reception data register that temporarily stores reception data read from the reception shift register, and serial communication Is provided with an interrupt control circuit for controlling the generation of an interrupt factor related to the receiving operation.

  The transmission operation unit 302 generates transmission data corresponding to the read data from the serial communication data register 303 by transmission operation based on the setting in the predetermined bit of the serial control register 305, and enables transmission by serial communication. Further, the transmission operation unit 302 sets a predetermined bit of the serial status register 304 to “0” or “1” according to an operation state in the transmission operation. The transmission operation unit 302 is, for example, a transmission data register that temporarily stores data read from the serial communication data register 303, a transmission shift register that stores and shifts transmission data that is sequentially transmitted via serial communication, It includes an interrupt control circuit that controls the generation of interrupt factors related to transmission operations in serial communication.

  The serial communication data register 303 stores the reception data acquired by the reception operation unit 301 or stores data to be supplied to the transmission operation unit 302, thereby communicating between the serial communication circuit 118 and the CPU 114. This is a circuit that enables data exchange, and is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits).

  The serial status register 304 is a register for confirming the operation state in the serial communication circuit 118. For example, the serial status register 304 includes first and second registers SIST1 and SIST2 each capable of storing 8-bit data. Each bit of data stored in the first and second registers SIST1 and SIST2 only needs to indicate a flag state (on state or off state) corresponding to the operation state in the serial communication circuit 118. The flags indicating the operation state in the serial communication circuit 118 include a transmission data empty flag (TDRE), a transmission completion flag (TC), a reception data full flag (RDRF), an idle line detection flag (IDLE), and an overrun error flag (OR ), A noise error flag (NF), a framing error flag (FE), a parity error flag (PF), a reception active flag (RAF), and the like.

  The transmission data empty flag is turned on in response to completion of data transfer from the transmission data register included in the transmission operation unit 302 to the transmission shift register. The transmission completion flag is turned on in response to the completion of transmission of data stored in the transmission shift register included in the transmission operation unit 302. The reception data full flag is turned on in response to data stored in the reception shift register included in the reception operation unit 301 being transferred to the reception data register. The idle line detection flag is turned on in response to detection of a predetermined idle line in the reception data in the reception operation unit 301.

  The overrun flag is turned on in response to an overrun detected during the reception operation in the reception operation unit 301. The noise error flag is turned on in response to detection of a noise error during the reception operation in the reception operation unit 301. The framing error flag is turned on in response to the detection of a framing error during the reception operation in the reception operation unit 301. The parity error flag is turned on in response to the fact that the parity of the received data in the reception operation unit 301 does not match the parity bit in the received data. The reception active flag is turned on in response to the reception operation unit 301 detecting “0” as the start bit.

  The serial control register 305 is a register for setting a communication format in the serial communication circuit 118 and permission / prohibition of various error interrupt requests. For example, the serial control register 305 includes first to third registers SICL1 to SICL3 each capable of storing 8-bit data. Each bit of data stored in the first to third registers SICL <b> 1 to SICL <b> 3 only needs to indicate the control content of the communication operation in the serial communication circuit 118.

  For example, the data stored in the first register SICL1 included in the serial control register 305 includes a bit (M) for selecting a data length in serial communication, a bit (WAKE) for selecting a wake-up method, an idle line Bit (ILT) for selecting the detection method, bit (PE) for setting whether to use the parity function, bit (PT) for selecting the type of parity when the parity function is used, etc. Is included.

  The data stored in the second register SICL2 included in the serial control register 305 includes a bit (TIE) for setting permission / prohibition of a transmission interrupt request and a bit for setting permission / prohibition of a transmission completion interrupt request. (TCIE), a bit (RIE) for setting permission / prohibition of a reception interrupt request, a bit (ILIE) for setting permission / prohibition of an idle line interrupt request, and whether or not to use the transmission operation unit 302 Bit (TE) for setting, bit (RE) for setting whether to use reception operation unit 301, bit (RWU) for setting whether to use reception wakeup, break code A bit (SBK) for setting whether or not to use transmission is included.

  Further, the data stored in the third register SICL3 included in the serial control register 305 includes a bit (R8) for storing the ninth bit in the received data when the number of bits of the received data is set to 9 bits, overrun Bit (ORIE) for setting enable / disable of interrupt request at error, bit (NEIE) for setting enable / disable of interrupt request at noise error, Enable / disable of interrupt request at framing error It includes a bit (FEIE) for setting, a bit (PEIE) for setting permission / prohibition of an interrupt request when a parity error occurs.

  An input / output port 119 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 7 includes an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting.

  The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13, and receives the image display device 5. In addition, various circuits for controlling electric parts for production such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 has predetermined electrical components for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lamp lighting operation and extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9. It has a function of determining the control content for executing the rendering operation.

  The effect control board 12 is connected to wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a driving signal to the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9. In addition, wiring from the operation switch 40 is also connected to the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, an effect control microcomputer 120, a display control unit 121, a sound control unit 122, and a lamp control unit 123 are mounted on the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The presentation control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 22 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, a random number circuit 134, and an input / output port 135.

  In the effect control board 12, the random number circuit 134 generates all or a part of various random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side. For example, on the side of the effect control board 12, a random number SR1 for notice determination as shown in FIG. 23 is used. In addition, in order to enhance the effect, for example, a random value other than the random number SR1 for determining the notice, such as a random value for determining the fixed decorative design, may be used on the effect control board 12 side. The numerical data indicating the random number value SR1 for determining the notice may be counted by the random number circuit 134. Alternatively, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR1 for determining the notice may be counted by updating by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 134 by the CPU 131. The random number SR1 for determining the notice determines whether or not to execute the notice effect for notifying that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a big hit. It is a random value used for determining the aspect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The CPU 131 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 22 reads the user program and data stored in the ROM 132 and uses the RAM 133 as a work area to perform a control operation according to the program.

  The ROM 132 stores, for example, data constituting a plurality of types of decorative design determination tables, a preliminary determination determination table, a pre-transfer setting table, and an effect control pattern table as data for determining the control operation by the CPU 131. The decorative symbol determination table is a table used to determine a fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result of decorative symbols in the image display device 5.

  As a specific example of the notice determination table, in this embodiment, the loss notice notice determination table 201 shown in FIG. 24A and the big hit notice decision table 202 shown in FIG. Has been. In this embodiment, notice A to notice D are used as the notice patterns for notifying that there is a possibility that a definite decorative combination of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed as a variable display result in a predetermined period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. It is assumed that a pattern is prepared. When one of the notice patterns from notice A to notice D is selected, for example, a decorative pattern such as a period from when the decorative display variable display mode reaches reach until the confirmed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is displayed. A notice that the variable display result will be a big hit by changing the display of the notice effect effect image such as the effect character and the background image on the screen of the image display device 5 with the elapsed time in the predetermined variable display period. A notice effect display is executed. Here, the effect character may be a character or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character or a number, or any other figure. When the variable display pattern is a normal loss pattern, the notice effect display may be executed in a predetermined period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed without the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol being reached.

  25 (A) to 25 (C) show the image display device 5 corresponding to the fact that the notice pattern of notice A is selected when the effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first effect mode # 1. An image display example is shown. As shown in FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (C), when the notice pattern of notice A is selected in the first effect mode # 1, a person is selected during a predetermined period in which decorative symbols are variably displayed. It can be predicted that the variable display result will be a big hit by changing the display of the effect character so that the character CH1 to be displayed moves from the right end to the left end in the display area in the image display device 5 as time passes. . However, even during the predetermined period in which the notice effect display is executed, until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, the display of the image indicating the character CH1 is limited, and the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected. In response to this, an image showing the character CH1 is displayed step by step.

  FIGS. 25D to 25F show the image display device 5 corresponding to the fact that the notice pattern of the notice B is selected when the effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first effect mode # 1. An image display example is shown. As shown in FIGS. 25 (D) to (F), when the notice pattern of notice B is selected in the first production mode # 1, the vehicle is moved in the predetermined period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. It can be predicted that the variable display result will be a big hit by changing the display of the effect character so that the character CH2 to be displayed moves from the right end to the left end in the display area in the image display device 5 as time passes. . However, even during the predetermined period in which the notice effect display is executed, until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, the display of the image indicating the character CH2 is restricted, and the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected. In response to this, an image showing the character CH2 is displayed stepwise.

  FIGS. 26A to 26C show the image display device 5 corresponding to the fact that the notice pattern of the notice C is selected when the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first effect mode # 1. An image display example is shown. As shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to (C), when the notice pattern of notice C is selected in the first production mode # 1, stars are displayed in a predetermined period during which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. It can be predicted that the variable display result will be a big hit by changing the display of the effect character so that the character CH3 to be displayed moves from the right end to the left end in the display area in the image display device 5 as time passes. . However, even during the predetermined period in which the notice effect display is executed, until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, the display of the image indicating the character CH3 is limited, and the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected. In response to this, an image showing the character CH3 is displayed step by step.

  26D to 26F show the image display device 5 corresponding to the fact that the notice pattern of the notice D is selected when the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first effect mode # 1. An image display example is shown. As shown in FIGS. 26D to 26F, when the notice pattern of notice D is selected in the first effect mode # 1, a predetermined pattern is displayed in a predetermined period during which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. As the display of the effect character changes so that the character CH4 moves from the right end to the left end in the display area of the image display device 5 as time passes, it can be predicted that the variable display result will be a big hit. However, even during the predetermined period in which the notice effect display is executed, until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, the display of the image indicating the character CH4 is limited, and the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected. In response to this, an image showing the character CH3 is displayed step by step.

  FIG. 27A shows a display example of a background image on the image display device 5 corresponding to the selection of “without notice” when the mode of the performance operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second performance mode # 2. Show. FIG. 27B shows the background image in the image display device 5 corresponding to the selection of the notice pattern of the notice A when the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second effect mode # 2. A display example is shown. FIG. 27C shows a background image in the image display device 5 corresponding to the selection of the notice pattern of the notice B when the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second effect mode # 2. A display example is shown. FIG. 27D shows a background image in the image display device 5 corresponding to the selection of the notice pattern of the notice C when the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second effect mode # 2. A display example is shown. FIG. 27E shows the background image in the image display device 5 corresponding to the selection of the notice pattern of the notice D when the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second effect mode # 2. A display example is shown. As described above, when the effect operation mode is set to the second effect mode # 2, no notice is selected, or any one of the notice patterns from notice A to notice D is selected. Correspondingly, different background images are displayed. However, even during a predetermined period in which the notice effect by changing the background image is executed, until no operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, no notice shown in FIG. 27A is selected. Corresponding background images are displayed, and in response to the detection of the operation of the operation switch 40, background images corresponding to the respective notice patterns A to D are displayed stepwise.

  The lost time notice determination table 201 shown in FIG. 24A and the big hit notice determination table 202 shown in FIG. A determination result indicating that a notice according to any one of the notice patterns A to D is executed is made up of setting data and the like to be associated with each other. In the notice-of-losing notice determination table 201, “1” to “50” of the random number SR1 for determining notice are determined to not execute the notice, and “51” to “85” are notices according to the notice pattern of the notice A. “86” to “95” are executed in accordance with the result of the notice of the notice B, and “96” to “99” are executed in the notice of the notice pattern of the notice C. “100” is associated with the determination result indicating that the advance notice by the advance notice pattern of the advance notice D is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot notice determination table 202, “1” to “5” of the random number SR1 for notice determination are “6” to “15” as the notice A for the decision result that the notice is not executed. “16” to “30” are determined to execute the notice according to the notice pattern of the notice B, and “31” to “50” are the notice of the notice C. “51” to “100” are associated with the determination result of executing the notice by the notice pattern of the notice D, respectively, with the decision result of executing the notice by the pattern.

  When the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is lost, the notice pattern is determined with reference to the notice determination table 201 at the time of loss shown in FIG. 24A, while the variable display result is a big hit. In this case, by referring to the jackpot notice determination table 202 shown in FIG. 24B, the notice pattern is determined, and the notice of each notice pattern is selected with a probability as shown in FIG. Will be executed. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the notification is not executed with the probability of 50/100, while the notification A with the probability of 35/100 and the notification B with the probability of 10/100, 4 / The notices according to the respective notice patterns, ie, notice C with a probability of 100 and notice D with a probability of 1/100, are executed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the announcement is not executed with a probability of 5/100, while the announcement A with a probability of 10/100, the announcement B with a probability of 15/100, the probability of 20/100 Thus, the advance notice C, the advance notice D with a probability of 50/100, is executed according to the respective advance notice patterns.

  Based on the selection probability of the notice by each notice pattern, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit when the notice effect display by each notice pattern is performed (that is, the probability that the notice hits when the notice appears) ) As a big hit reliability (prediction big hit reliability). For example, the jackpot reliability of the notice according to each notice pattern is ((selection probability of the notice pattern at the time of big hit) × (probability of big hit)) / ((selection probability of the notice pattern at the time of loss) × (loss probability) + (Selection probability of the notice pattern at the time of big hit) × (big hit probability)).

  In the pachinko machine 1, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is made so that the number of executions of variable display in which the display result is lost is sufficiently larger than the number of executions of variable display in which the display result is a big hit. The probability that the result will be a big hit (hit probability) is determined. For example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300 as shown in FIG. 24C, the display result is a jackpot while the variable display that causes the display result to be lost on average is executed 299 times. The variable display is designed to be executed at a rate of once. Therefore, the notice effect image used in the notice effect display that is executed with a high probability when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is lost is the notice effect used in the notice effect display that is executed with a low probability. It is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 more frequently than the image.

  The advance transfer setting table stores image element data indicating image elements set so as to increase the display frequency in the image display device 5 among a plurality of types of image element data including image element data indicating various effect images. Before the image element is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the image element is transferred in advance from the CGROM 142 (FIG. 32) provided in the display control unit 121 to the image temporary storage memory 155 (FIG. 32) in the VDP 141. It is a table used for commanding. As a specific example of the advance transfer setting table, the advance transfer setting table 211 as shown in FIG. 28A is used in this embodiment. The advance transfer setting table 211 shown in FIG. 28A is composed of 3N + 1 (N is an arbitrary natural number) table data, and the table data read from the advance transfer setting table 211 is a count value in the advance transfer counter. It is determined by a certain advance transfer count value.

  In the advance transfer setting table 211, as table data for specifying image element data to be transferred from the CGROM 142 to the image temporary storage memory 155 in advance, the number of processes, read addresses # 1 to #N, write address # 1 ~ # N, image element data amounts # 1 to #N, and the like are stored. Here, the frequency with which each image element is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is the effect mode # 1 of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the second effect mode # 2. Differences occur. For example, in the first effect mode # 1, symbols indicating Arabic numerals “1” to “8” are used as decorative symbols, while in the second effect mode # 2, “one” to “eight” are used as decorative symbols. The symbol showing the Chinese numerals is used. Accordingly, Arabic numerals “1” to “8” that are set so as to increase the display frequency in the case of the first effect mode # 1 despite being set to the second effect mode # 2. Even if the image element data corresponding to the design indicating is temporarily stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155, there is no opportunity to use these image element data, and the use efficiency of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28B, the advance transfer setting table 211A corresponding to the first effect mode # 1 and the advance transfer setting table 211B corresponding to the second effect mode # 2. Are prepared in advance, and the display frequency is set so as to correspond to whether the mode of the performance operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first performance mode # 1 or the second performance mode # 2. The image element data indicating the image element is transferred from the CGROM 142 to the image temporary storage memory 155 in advance.

  As a specific example of the effect control pattern table, an effect control pattern table 221 having a configuration as shown in FIG. 29A is used in this embodiment. This effect control pattern table 221 shows the contents of various effect controls such as the contents of display operations in the image display device 5, the contents of audio output control of the speakers 8L, 8R, etc., the contents of effects by the game effect lamp 9, etc. A plurality of types of data are stored as production control patterns. The plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 221 are, for example, as shown in FIG. 30, effect control timer setting values, effect control timer determination values # 1 to #n (n is an arbitrary natural number), The image display device 5 is composed of various data for controlling the production operation, such as display control data # 1 to #n, audio control data # 1 to #n, and lamp control data # 1 to #n. The contents of various effects control, such as the contents displayed on the screen, the contents of audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the contents of effects by the game effect lamp 9, and the switching timing of the effects control are set.

  In the effect control pattern table 221, for example, a plurality of types of effect control patterns corresponding to the effect operation within a period in which the decorative display variable display is executed on the image display device 5 are stored. In addition, the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect operation within the period in which the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect are executed is also stored in the effect control pattern table 221. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29B, an effect control pattern table 221A corresponding to the first effect mode # 1 and an effect control pattern table 221B corresponding to the second effect mode # 2 are provided. Data prepared in advance and constituting each effect control pattern table 221A, 221B is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 132.

  In addition, the ROM 132 sets an alpha (α) value indicating opacity in each pixel of the effect image corresponding to each of the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background image used in the notice patterns of notice A to notice D. The data shown is stored. In this embodiment, in response to the operation switch 40 being operated during a predetermined period in which the notice effect display is executed, the character images CH1 to CH4 corresponding to the notice mode and each notice pattern of notice A to notice D are displayed. The background image is displayed in stages as time passes. In order to realize such a display operation, alpha value distribution setting data indicating the distribution of the alpha value in each effect image is prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 132. The alpha value distribution setting data may be created as follows.

  For example, object model data indicating display objects DOB corresponding to the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background image are prepared as image element data indicating the effect images in the respective notice patterns of notice A to notice D. The object model data may be data indicating a combination of a plurality of polygons and a plurality of basic shapes corresponding to, for example, the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background images. Or the data which shows the shape itself of each character image CH1-CH4 and each background image may be sufficient. FIG. 31A shows a display object DOB corresponding to the character image CH1 as an example. First, in each of the display objects DOB corresponding to the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background images, alpha (α) value data indicating the opacity of each pixel in the display image is set to “1.0”. Keep it.

  Subsequently, data indicating a filter used for changing the setting of the alpha value in the display object DOB is prepared. This data is data for setting the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background images so that they can be displayed in stages as time passes by acting on the alpha value of the display object DOB. FIG. 31B shows, as an example, each character image CH1 to CH4 and each background so that each character image CH1 to CH4 and each background image can be displayed uniformly and stepwise over time. It is a figure which shows filter FL1 for setting the alpha value data corresponding to the display color data of each pixel which comprises an image. In the filter FL1 shown in FIG. 31B, a filter in which the minimum value “0.01” to the maximum value “0.99” are uniformly distributed in the display areas of the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background images. A coefficient is defined.

  The alpha value indicated by the alpha value data corresponding to each pixel in the display object DOB is multiplied by a filter coefficient corresponding to the display position of each pixel using the filter FL1. Subsequently, the alpha value data corresponding to each pixel in the display object DOB is replaced with data indicating the multiplication value obtained at this time. For example, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel in the display object DOB indicating the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 31 (A) is “1.0”, but as shown in FIG. 31 (B). By multiplying a filter coefficient corresponding to the display position of each pixel using the filter FL1, a new alpha value corresponding to each pixel in the display image of the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 31C is specified. It will be. Thus, the data obtained for each character image CH1 to CH4 and each background image may be associated with each effect image and stored in the ROM 132 as alpha value distribution setting data.

  The RAM 133 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 22 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the RAM 133, a confirmed decorative symbol storage unit, an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, an effect control buffer setting unit, a variable display pattern storage unit, a display result storage unit, a special figure hold An area for holding various data may be provided as a storage number storage unit, a round number storage unit, a notice pattern storage unit, and the like.

  Here, the determined decorative symbol storage unit stores data indicating the fixed decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5. The effect control flag setting unit sets a plurality of types of flags that are set or cleared according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. Store the data. The effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values used for effect control such as display control on the image display device 5, for example. The effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating a plurality of types of count values used for effect control such as display control on the image display device 5, for example. The circuit used for flag setting and counter / timer may be configured by a register circuit provided separately from the RAM 133.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with an effect side reception command buffer for temporarily storing commands from the main board 11 received by the effect control board 12. The variable display pattern storage unit stores data that can specify the variable display pattern notified from the main board 11 and the presence / absence of the probability variation re-lottery effect, for example, by storing EXT data in the variable display start command. The display result storage unit stores data that can specify the type of the display result notified from the main board 11 and the presence / absence of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect, for example, by storing the EXT data in the display result notification command. The special figure reserved memory number storage unit stores data that can specify the special figure reserved memory number notified from the main board 11. The round number storage unit stores data that can specify the round number in the big hit gaming state notified from the main board 11 by storing, for example, EXT data in the big hit round number notification command. The notice pattern storage unit stores data that can specify the notice pattern determined to execute the notice effect display.

  The input / output port 135 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 is an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 120 and to transmit various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120. Output port. For example, from the output port of the input / output port 135, a display control command transmitted to the display control unit 121, a voice control command transmitted to the sound control unit 122, and a lamp control transmitted to the lamp control unit 123. Commands are output. The input port of the input / output port 135 includes an input terminal for a detection signal (switch operation detection signal) transmitted from the operation switch 40.

  The display control unit 121 shown in FIG. 2 controls the display operation in the image display device 5 based on a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, the display control unit 121 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effects display by causing the image display device 5 to perform switching display of images.

  FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of the display control unit 121. As shown in FIG. 32, the display control unit 121 includes a VDP 141 (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 142. The VDP 141 has, for example, a high-speed drawing function and a display output function for displaying an image on the image display device 5, and executes image processing according to a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. The CGROM 142 stores various image data used for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The image data stored in the CGROM 142 includes a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images indicating a plurality of types of decorative symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, a CGROM interface 153, a drawing circuit 154, an image element temporary storage memory 155, a frame buffer memory 156, and a display circuit 157. I have.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the production control microcomputer 120. The transfer control circuit 152 controls the transfer of the image element data read from the CGROM 142 to the image element temporary storage memory 155 based on a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, the transfer control circuit 152 includes a DMA device for transferring data from the CGROM 142 to the image element temporary storage memory 155 using DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer.

  The CGROM interface 153 includes an address output terminal and a data input terminal for reading image element data stored in the CGROM 142. The drawing circuit 154 executes a drawing process for creating image display data in the image display device 5 based on the image element data temporarily stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155.

  The image element temporary storage memory 155 is configured using, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and temporarily stores image element data read from the CGROM 142. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an address map in the image element temporary storage memory 155. As shown in FIG. 33, the image element temporary storage memory 155 is provided with a fixed address area 155A and an automatic transfer area 155B.

  Fixed address area 155A indicates an image element that is set to have a higher display frequency among a plurality of types of image elements such as decorative designs, effect characters, and background images displayed on the screen of image display device 5. This is a storage area for temporarily storing image element data. For example, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed corresponding to the set effect mode are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at least once during the period in which the variable display is executed each time. On the other hand, when the announcement effect image such as the effect character or the background image used for announcing that the variable display result is a big hit is determined to execute the corresponding announcement effect at the start of the variable display. In this case, the image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 within a predetermined period during which the variable display is executed. That is, the image element that becomes the decorative design is set so that the display frequency on the image display device 5 is higher than the image element that becomes the notice effect image. In addition, among the notice effect images, the notice effect image used in the notice effect having a low jackpot reliability is displayed more frequently in the image display device 5 than the notice effect image used in the notice effect having a high jackpot reliability. Is set to be higher.

  The automatic transfer area 155B is a storage area that can temporarily store image element data indicating image elements that are displayed less frequently on the image display device 5 than image elements that store image element data in the fixed address area 155A. The automatic transfer area 155B may temporarily store various data such as moving image data that is not stored in the fixed address area 155A. In this embodiment, the storage area from the address STADD to the address ENADD in the image element temporary storage memory 155 is set in the automatic transfer area 155B. The address STADD and the address ENADD are notified from the CPU 131 to the VDP 141 by a storage area setting command (FIG. 38) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in this embodiment, the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 corresponds to each of the character images CH1 to CH4 and background images used in the respective notice patterns of notice A to notice D. An area for temporarily storing the obtained image element data is provided. For example, the image element data corresponding to the character image CH1 used in the notice pattern of notice A in the first effect mode # 1 is temporarily stored in the area of + 000000h to + 00FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B. Is done. The image element data corresponding to the character image CH2 used in the notice pattern of notice B in the first effect mode # 1 is temporarily stored in an area from + 010000h to + 01FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area. The image element data corresponding to the character image CH3 used in the notice pattern of notice C in the first effect mode # 1 is temporarily stored in the area from the + 020000h to + 02FFFFh offset from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B. . The image element data corresponding to the character image CH4 used in the notice pattern of notice D in the first effect mode # 1 is temporarily stored in the area where the offset from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B is + 030000h to 03FFFFh. .

  Further, for example, the image element data corresponding to the background image used in the notice pattern of notice A in the second effect mode # 2 is temporarily stored in the area where the offset from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B is + 0800000h to + 17FFFFh. Remembered. The image element data corresponding to the background image used in the notice pattern of notice B in the second effect mode # 2 is temporarily stored in the area where the offset from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B is + 18000h to 27FFFFh. The image element data corresponding to the background image used in the notice pattern of notice C in the second rendering mode # 2 is temporarily stored in the area of + 280000h to + 37FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B. The image element data corresponding to the background image used in the notice pattern of notice D in the second effect mode # 2 is temporarily stored in the area of + 380000h to + 47FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B.

  In the image element temporary storage memory 155, as shown in FIG. 35 as an example, each value of R, G, B, and α is stored as pixel data PD1 having a total of 32 bits of 8 bits corresponding to each pixel. Is done. In the VDP 141, for example, the image element data read from the CGROM 142 by the transfer control circuit 152 is written and stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155, and then notified by an alpha value distribution setting command (FIG. 38) from the effect control microcomputer 120. The drawing circuit 154 can write and set data indicating the alpha value thus set at an address corresponding to each pixel.

  The frame buffer memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM or the like different from the image element temporary storage memory 155, and stores image display data created by a drawing process or the like by the drawing circuit 154. For example, the frame buffer memory 156 has a storage capacity larger than the capacity of the image data used for displaying an image in the display area for one screen in the image display device 5. As an example, as shown in FIG. 36, each value of R, G, and B is stored in the frame buffer memory 156 as pixel data PD2 having a total of 24 bits of 8 bits corresponding to each pixel.

  The display circuit 157 shown in FIG. 32 uses the display data read from the frame buffer memory 156 as gradation data, generates a scanning signal based on a predetermined clock signal, and outputs it to the image display device 5. This is a circuit for displaying an image on the screen of the display device 5.

  In addition, the VDP 141 has a table that can specify the image element data read from the CGROM 142 and temporarily stored in the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 as shown in FIG. An index table 251 is provided. In the index table 251 shown in FIG. 37, for example, data indicating “start address”, “horizontal size”, “reading completion flag”, and the like are stored in association with data indicating “index number”. Here, “start address” indicates the head address of the image element data stored in the CGROM 142. The “horizontal size” indicates the horizontal size of the effect image indicated by the image element data. The “reading completion flag” indicates “ON” when the transfer of the image element data read from the CGROM 142 to the image element temporary storage memory 155 is completed, and when the transfer is not completed or read from the automatic transfer area 155B. When the writing to the frame buffer memory 156 is completed, “OFF” is indicated.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating specific examples of various commands serving as display control commands transmitted from the CPU 131 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141. As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, commands such as a storage area setting command, advance transfer command, automatic transfer display command, fixed address designation display command, advance notice transfer command, alpha value distribution setting command, test execution command, etc. Is transmitted from the CPU 131 to the VDP 141 as a display control command.

  The storage area setting command is a command for instructing setting of a storage area in the image element temporary storage memory 155. For example, the storage area setting command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the address STADD that is the head of the automatic transfer area 155B, the address ENADD that is the end of the automatic transfer area 155B, and the like.

  The advance transfer command is used to store image element data stored in the CGROM 142 in advance in the image element temporary storage memory 155 for image element data that is set so as to increase the frequency of image display using the corresponding effect image. This is a command for instructing transfer to the fixed address area 155A. For example, the advance transfer command includes a read address of image element data in the CGROM 142, a write address of image element data in the fixed address area 155A, a data amount of image element data to be read from the CGROM 142 and transferred to the fixed address area 155A, and the like. , Data for notifying the VDP 141 is included.

  The automatic transfer display command is an automatic transfer setting in the VDP 141 for image element data stored in the CGROM 142 that has not been transferred to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 in advance. This is a command for instructing to display the image element indicated by the image element data on the screen of the image display device 5 by writing to the frame buffer memory 156 based on the above. Here, the automatic transfer setting in the VDP 141 is automatically set in the VDP 141 without specifying the storage address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 from the CPU 131. It is included. For example, the automatic transfer display command is data for notifying the VDP 141 of the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142, the write address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156, the data amount of the image element data read from the CGROM 142, and the like. Is included.

  The fixed address designation display command causes the image element data transferred in advance from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 to be written in the frame buffer memory 156, and the image element indicated by the image element data is displayed. This is a command for instructing display on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the fixed address designation display command indicates the read address of the image element data in the fixed address area 155A, the write address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156, the data amount of the image element data read from the fixed address area 155A, etc. Data for notifying the VDP 141 is included.

  The notice transfer command is a notice display that is a period in which an image display serving as a notice effect is executed for the character image CH1 to CH4 and the image element data corresponding to the background image used in each of the notice patterns of notice A to notice D. This is a command for instructing transfer from the CGROM 142 to the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 before the period starts. For example, the notice transfer command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142, the data amount of the image element data, and the like.

  The alpha value distribution setting command is a command for instructing the setting of the alpha value in each pixel of the effect image showing the decorative design based on the alpha value distribution setting data read from the ROM 132. For example, the alpha value distribution setting command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the decoration pattern to be displayed, the alpha value setting data of each pixel in the effect image showing the decoration pattern, and the like.

  The test execution command is a command for instructing image processing by the alpha test. Here, when the alpha test is executed, a comparison operation between the alpha value of each pixel and the alpha reference value is executed, and only the pixels that satisfy the display condition based on the comparison function are displayed on the screen, and the display condition is satisfied. Display of missing pixels is limited. For example, the test execution command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of an alpha reference value, comparison function setting data, a write address in the frame buffer memory 156, and the like.

  Instead of the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142, for example, identification information attached to the effect image indicated by the image element data to be read (for example, the character number of the effect character indicated by the image element data or the image number of the background image) Any information that makes it possible to specify the reading position of the image element data read from the CGROM 142 may be used. Further, instead of the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156, for example, the display coordinates of the image element on the screen of the image display device 5 (for example, the upper left display coordinates in the image element), etc. Arbitrary information that makes it possible to specify the writing position of the image element data in may be used. Further, in place of the writing address or reading address of the image element data in the fixed address area 155A, for example, an image element in the fixed address area 155A such as an index number associated with the image element data in the index table 251 shown in FIG. Arbitrary information that makes it possible to specify the data writing position and reading position may be used.

  The CGROM 142 is used to store various image element data used for displaying various effect images including decorative designs on the image display device 5. For example, in the CGROM 142, image element data or the like indicating each of the effect characters including the decorative design is stored at a predetermined address as shown in FIG. 39, for example. In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 can read out image element data stored in the CGROM 142 by designating the read address of the CGROM 142 via the CGROM interface 153 and turning on the read control signal.

  The sound control unit 122 shown in FIG. 2 controls the sound output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, the sound control unit 122 includes an audio output circuit that generates an audio signal corresponding to an audio control command from the production control microcomputer 120 and outputs the audio signal to the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like.

  The lamp control unit 123 controls the lighting operation, the extinguishing operation, the blinking operation, and the like in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on a lamp control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, the lamp control unit 123 generates a lamp drive signal corresponding to the lamp control command from the effect control microcomputer 120 and supplies the lamp drive signal to the game effect lamp 9, various decorative lamps, and an electric decoration member such as an LED. Includes a lamp driver circuit that performs lighting operation, extinguishing operation, blinking operation, and the like.

  The sound control unit 122 and the lamp control unit 123 may be mounted on a predetermined control board installed outside the effect control board 12.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a payout control microcomputer 150 is mounted on the payout control board 15. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15. A payout control microcomputer 150 shown in FIG. 40 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer similar to the game control microcomputer 100, and includes a clock circuit 271, a reset / interrupt controller 272, a CPU 273, a ROM 274, a RAM 275, A timer circuit (PIT) 276, a serial communication circuit (SCI) 277, and an input / output port 278 are provided. The clock circuit 271, the reset / interrupt controller 272, the timer circuit 276, and the serial communication circuit 277 are respectively a clock circuit 111, a reset / interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 117, and a serial communication circuit 118 included in the game control microcomputer 100. Any device having the same configuration may be used.

  The ROM 274 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150 stores a payout control program. In the payout control microcomputer 150, for example, the CPU 273 reads a payout control program stored in the ROM 274, and performs various processes based on the payout control command transmitted from the main board 11, the communication result with the card unit 70, and the like. To control the game ball payout operation.

  The RAM 275 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the payout operation of the game ball. At least a part of the RAM 275 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply board 10. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 275 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150 is stored for a predetermined time.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from the power supply board 10 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 114 executes a game control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control main process shown in FIG. 41 is started, first, interrupt prohibition is set (step S1), and an interrupt mode is set (step S2). For example, in step S2, the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 100 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: the least significant bit is “0”) output by the built-in device are synthesized. Sets the interrupt mode for maskable interrupts that generate interrupt addresses. When a maskable interrupt is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 is automatically set to be in an interrupt disabled state, and the contents of the program counter may be saved in the stack.

  Subsequently, settings relating to the stack pointer such as setting of a stack pointer designation address are performed (step S3). Further, the internal device register in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (initialized) (step S4). For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 has a built-in CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), the CPU 114 executes the process of step S4, whereby a built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit). CTC or PIO as () is preferably set (initialized).

  After executing the process of step S4, is the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 10 or the like turned off, for example, by checking the state of a predetermined bit in the input port included in the input / output port 119? It is determined whether or not (step S5). When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, various power supply voltages generated by the power supply board 10 gradually increase and reach a specified value. In response to this, the power-off signal is switched from the on state to the off state. In the process of step S5, it is confirmed that the power-off signal is not output and is in an off state (high level). Here, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 114 may confirm the state of the power-off signal only once via the input port, but may confirm the state of the power-off signal a plurality of times. Good. For example, once it is confirmed that the power-off signal is in the off state, the power-off signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. At this time, if the power-off signal is off, it is determined that the power-off signal is off. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the power-off signal is in the on state, it may be confirmed that the power-off signal is continuously in the on state after a predetermined time has elapsed. It should be noted that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the power-off signal may be one or multiple times. In addition, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  When the power cut-off signal is in the on state in step S5 (step S5; No), after waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) to elapse (step S6), the process returns to step S5 to return to the power supply. It is determined again whether or not the disconnection signal is off. Thereby, the game control microcomputer 100 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable. When the power-off signal is off in step S5 (step S5; Yes), the RAM 116 is set to be accessible (step S7).

  Subsequently, the CPU 114 determines whether or not a clear signal for initializing the storage contents of the RAM 116 is turned on (step S8). The clear signal may be a signal transmitted from the predetermined clear switch to the main board 11 via the power supply board 10, for example. Further, after checking whether or not the clear signal is on, the start timing of the game control process for controlling the progress of the game may be delayed until a predetermined time elapses due to execution of the software. In addition, the CPU 114 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed once that the state of the clear signal is OFF, the state of the clear signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed. At this time, if the clear signal is off, it is determined that the clear signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the clear signal is on at this time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the clear signal may be one time or a plurality of times. In addition, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  When the clear signal is OFF in step S8 (step S8; No), data check of the RAM 116 is performed to determine whether or not the check result is normal (step S9). In the process of step S9, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 116, and the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the main checksum buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 166 are calculated. And compare. Here, the main checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. The main checksum buffer is included in the backup area of the RAM 116 that is backed up by the backup power source, and the contents of the main checksum buffer are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. If the comparison result between the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the main checksum buffer does not match, the data in the specific area of the RAM 116 is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. Is determined to be not normal.

  When the check result in step S9 is normal (step S9; Yes), it is determined whether or not the main backup flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 is on (step S10). The state of the main backup flag is set in the game control flag setting unit 163 when the power supply is stopped. The main backup flag setting location is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the main backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped. In the process of step S10, for example, if “55H” is set in the game control flag setting unit 163 as the value of the main backup flag, it is determined that there is a backup (ON state). On the other hand, if a value other than “55H” is set, it is determined that there is no backup (OFF state). Note that the determination as to whether or not the main backup flag is turned on as in step S10 is performed prior to the determination of the check result as in step S9, and the data check of the RAM 116 is performed when the main backup flag is turned on. You may make it determine whether a result is normal.

  When the main backup flag is on in step S10 (step S10; Yes), after clearing the main backup flag and turning it off (step S11), the CPU 114 changes the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 and the like. Setting at the time of recovery for returning to the state when the power supply is stopped is performed (step S12). As a specific example, in the process of step S12, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 115 is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 116. Here, the work area of the RAM 116 is backed up by a backup power source, and initialization data for an area that may be initialized among the work areas may be set in the backup time setting table.

  Further, when the clear signal is on in step S8 (step S8; Yes), when the check result is not normal in step S9 (step S9; No), or the main backup flag is off in step S10. If there is (step S10; No), the RAM 116 is initialized (step S13). Subsequent to the processing in step S13, settings at the time of initialization for setting the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 to the initial state are performed (step S14).

  After executing the processing of step S12 or step S14, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) by setting a register of the timer circuit 117 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The internal setting of the game control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S15). Thereafter, the CPU 114 executes a random number initial setting process for initial setting of the random number generation operation based on the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read from the ROM 115 (step S16).

  Subsequent to the random number initial setting process in step S16, a serial communication initial setting process for initial setting of the serial communication operation is executed (step S17). In the serial communication initial setting process, first, the CPU 114 reads the first and second serial communication initial setting data (KSCM1 and KSCM2) stored in the ROM 115. Subsequently, the serial control register 305 included in the serial communication circuit 118 is set based on the read value from the ROM 115. That is, each bit value stored in the first to third registers SICL1 to SICL3 included in the serial control register 305 corresponding to each bit value included in the first and second serial communication initial setting data (KSCM1 and KSCM2). Set up.

  After executing the serial communication initial setting process in step S17, an interrupt initial setting process for setting the priority order of the interrupt process executed based on the interrupt request is executed (step S18). In this interrupt initial setting process, first, the CPU 114 reads the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) stored in the ROM 115. Subsequently, the highest priority interrupt is set based on the read value from the ROM 115. For example, it is specified whether the value read from the ROM 115 is “00h” to “07h”, and the cause of the I class interrupt (IRQ) corresponding to the specified value is the highest priority interrupt factor. In addition, the reading order of stored data in a predetermined register is set. Data indicating the setting of the reading order may be stored in an internal register of the CPU 114, for example. In this case, the CPU 114 preferentially checks the data stored in the internal register when an interrupt request signal input from the reset / interrupt controller 112 to the I class interrupt (IRQ) terminal or the like is turned on. The interrupt process to be executed can be specified.

  Then, the CPU 114 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S19) and waits for the occurrence of various interrupts. For example, when a plurality of interrupt factors occur simultaneously in the timer circuit 117, the serial communication circuit 118, etc. after entering the interrupt enabled state, the reset / interrupt controller 112 is based on the setting in the interrupt initial setting process executed in step S18. Causes an interrupt factor with a higher priority to be accepted. When the reset / interrupt controller 112 accepts an interrupt factor, an on-state interrupt request signal is input to, for example, an I class interrupt (IRQ) terminal provided in the CPU 114. When an interrupt request signal in the on state is input to the IRQ terminal by the CPU 114, for example, a timer circuit, for example, in the order corresponding to the reading order set in the interrupt initial setting process based on the result of checking the data stored in the internal register. The bit value of stored data in a predetermined register such as the timer control register provided in 117 or the serial status register 304 provided in the serial communication circuit 118 may be read. From the stored data in the register thus read, the interrupt factor that occurred is identified, and the interrupt processing based on each interrupt factor is started by executing a program with the vector address corresponding to the identified interrupt factor as the start address Can do.

  As a specific example, when the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) is “05h”, first, a predetermined bit of the first register SIST1 included in the serial status register 304 is read. Subsequently, it is possible to determine whether or not an error interrupt has occurred in the serial communication circuit 118 by determining whether or not the bit value read at this time is “1”. When an error interrupt occurs, it is determined that the interrupt process corresponding to the generated error interrupt factor is to be executed, and for example, an interrupt vector stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 115 is acquired, and its vector address is set. Execute the program with the start address. Further, when the bit values of the predetermined bits of the first register SIST1 are all “0”, an external interrupt request signal is input to the IRQ terminal provided in the game control microcomputer 100 for a certain period. Determine whether an interrupt factor has occurred. At this time, if an external interrupt factor has occurred, interrupt processing corresponding to the external interrupt factor is executed. If no external interrupt factor has occurred, the stored data in the timer control register provided in the timer circuit 117 is read. Based on the read value, the timer circuit 117 determines whether or not a timer interrupt factor has occurred. At this time, if a timer interrupt factor has occurred in the timer circuit 117, timer interrupt processing corresponding to the timer interrupt factor is executed. If no timer interrupt factor has occurred, the serial status register 304 provided in the serial status register 304 It is determined whether a reception interrupt has occurred in the serial communication circuit 118 by reading a predetermined bit of one register SIST1 and determining whether any bit value is “1”. At this time, if it is determined that the reception interrupt has occurred because the predetermined bit value is “1”, the reception interrupt process corresponding to the reception interrupt factor generated in the serial communication circuit 118 is executed, If the bit value is “0”, a predetermined bit of the first register SIST1 included in the serial status register 304 is further read, and it is determined whether any of the bit values is “1”. The circuit 118 determines whether a transmission interrupt has occurred. At this time, if it is determined that a transmission interrupt has occurred because the predetermined bit value is “1”, a transmission interrupt process corresponding to the transmission interrupt factor generated in the serial communication circuit 118 is executed.

  In this way, by checking whether or not interrupt factors have occurred in the order according to the priority order based on the settings in the interrupt initialization process, if multiple interrupt factors occur at the same time, for example, a predetermined default time Interrupt processing based on an interrupt factor having a higher priority than interrupt processing based on an interrupt factor having a lower priority in the priority order changed by the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) stored in the ROM 115. It is executed with priority.

  As an example, when the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) stored in the ROM 115 is “06h”, the default priority order determined in advance by the setting in the interrupt initial setting process is determined from the serial communication circuit 118. The priority is changed so that the reception interrupt request has the highest priority. In this case, the interrupt process based on the reception interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118 is executed more preferentially than the interrupt process based on the error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118. As another example, when the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) stored in the ROM 115 is “07h”, the default priority order determined in advance by the setting in the interrupt initial setting process is the serial communication circuit 118. The priority is changed to give the highest priority to the transmission interrupt request from. In this case, the interrupt process based on the transmission interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118 is executed more preferentially than the interrupt process based on the error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118.

  Further, for example, at the time of default, the interrupt processing based on the interrupt request from the timer circuit 117 is set to be executed with priority over the interrupt processing based on the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118. When the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) stored in the ROM 115 is “05h”, “06h”, or “07h”, interrupt processing and reception based on an error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118, respectively. The interrupt process based on the interrupt request and the interrupt process based on the transmission interrupt request are executed with higher priority than the interrupt process based on the interrupt request from the timer circuit 117.

  Subsequent to the process of step S19, when no interrupt occurs or after the interrupt process corresponding to the interrupt factor is executed, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal has been turned on (whether it has been output). If it is off (step S20), and if it is off (step S20; No), it waits for the occurrence of various interrupts. When the power-off signal is turned on (step S20; Yes), after executing the main-side power-off process (step S21), a predetermined loop process is executed to control the game by stopping power supply. Wait until the microcomputer 100 stops operating.

  In the process of step S20, the state of the power-off signal may be confirmed only once via the input port included in the input / output port 119, but the state of the power-off signal may be confirmed a plurality of times. May be. For example, once it is confirmed that the power-off signal is in the off state, the power-off signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. At this time, if the power-off signal is off, it is determined that the power-off signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the power-off signal is on at this time, the state of the power-off signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the number of times of reconfirming the state of the power-off signal may be one time or may be a plurality of times. Further, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match. In this way, when checking the state of the power-off signal a plurality of times, for example, when starting a confirmation operation or when the first confirmation result and the second confirmation result are compared and there is a mismatch, Retriggering is performed to clear the WDT (watchdog timer) built in the control microcomputer 100. When the retrigger does not occur within a predetermined time for some reason (for example, program runaway), a user reset is generated based on a timeout signal output from the WDT, and the reset / interrupt controller 112, CPU 114, timer circuit After initializing each circuit such as 117 and serial communication circuit 118, execution of the user program may be started from an address indicated by a predetermined vector table to perform automatic recovery.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number initial setting process executed in step S16 of FIG. In the random number initial setting process shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 114 first reads the random number initial setting data (KRSS) stored in the ROM 115 (step S101), and outputs a clock signal provided in the random number circuit 113 based on the read value. Operation setting in the circuit 171 is performed (step S102). For example, when the value in a predetermined bit (for example, the fifth bit) of the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read in step S101 is “0”, the clock signal S1 output from the clock signal output circuit 171 is used as the reference clock. Setting is made so that the clock signal has the same cycle as the internal system clock CLK generated by the clock circuit 111. When the value in the predetermined bit is “1”, the clock signal S1 output from the clock signal output circuit 171 is set to be a clock signal having a period 16 times the internal system clock CLK serving as a reference clock. . In the process of step S102, the CPU 114 may directly set the operation of the clock signal output circuit 171 to output the clock signal corresponding to the read value in step S101. The operation of the clock signal output circuit 171 is indirectly controlled by setting control data corresponding to the read value in step S101 in a predetermined register provided internally or externally that can be referred to by the clock signal output circuit 171. You may make it do. When the control data is set in the register in step S102, for example, when the random number circuit 113 starts generating the random number value, the clock signal output circuit 171 refers to the control data stored in the register, and the control data is controlled. By performing the output operation of the clock signal according to the data, the clock signal according to the setting in step S102 can be output.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S102, the start value of the first round in the random number value generated in the random number circuit 113 by the value in a predetermined bit (for example, the fourth bit) of the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read out in step S101 ( The setting relating to the start value at start-up is specified (step S103). At this time, if the predetermined bit of the random number initial setting data (KRSS) is “0”, it is specified that the start value at startup is set to “0001h” which is a predetermined default value.

  The CPU 114 determines whether or not the setting specified in step S103 is a default value setting (S104). If the setting is a default value setting (step S104; Yes), the start value at startup is set to the default value. A decision to set to “0001h” is made (step S105). On the other hand, if the setting specified in step S103 is not a default value setting (step S104; No), the start value at the time of startup is unique identification information given to each game control microcomputer 100. A decision is made based on the ID number (step S106). Here, in the process of step S106, for example, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 read out from the ROM 115 by the CPU 114 may be set as the start value for the first round for generating a random value as it is. Or you may make it set the value calculated by performing predetermined | prescribed calculation using the ID number of the microcomputer 100 for game control to the start value of the 1st round for producing | generating a random value. For example, the CPU 114 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 read from the ROM 115 by performing a predetermined scramble process, or performs an operation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number. A value may be used.

  The start value determined in step S105 or step S106 is input to an initial value setting circuit 172 included in the random number circuit 113, and is set as a start value for the first round for generating a random value by the random number circuit 113. Is done. Note that the processing in step S105 and step S106 may be executed by the initial value setting circuit 172 included in the random number circuit 113. For example, when the CPU 114 determines that the default value is set in step S <b> 104, a predetermined first initial value setting signal is sent to the random number circuit 113. When the random number circuit 113 receives the first initial value setting signal from the CPU 114, the initial value setting circuit 172 reads data stored in a predetermined register, and inputs an initial value setting signal SK indicating the read value to the random number generation circuit 173. As a result, the start value at startup is set to “0001h”, which is the default value (processing corresponding to step S105). On the other hand, when the CPU 114 determines that the default value is not set in step S104, the second initial value setting signal different from the first initial value setting signal is sent to the random number circuit 113. When the random number circuit 113 receives the second initial value setting signal from the CPU 114, the initial value setting circuit 172 selects data generated based on the ID number stored in a predetermined register, and the initial value indicating the selected data is displayed. The start value at startup is set to a value based on the ID number, which is unique identification information assigned to each game control microcomputer 100, by inputting the value setting signal SK to the random number generation circuit 173 (step S106). Equivalent to Here, as for the ID number stored in the predetermined register, only a numerical value of digits that is equal to or less than “65535” which is the maximum value of the random number value may be extracted and set in the random number generation circuit 173. Alternatively, an ID number stored in a predetermined register is input to an arithmetic circuit (for example, a multiplier circuit) built in the initial value setting circuit 172, so that a predetermined calculation using a numerical value in each digit of the ID number is performed. Data that is executed and indicates a value calculated by this calculation may be set in the random number generation circuit 173. Further, the CPU 114 may directly control the operation of the initial value setting circuit 172 to execute the processing corresponding to steps S105 and S106. For example, the CPU 114 is provided inside or outside the random number circuit 113 for initial value setting control. The operation of the initial value setting circuit 172 is performed by setting control data corresponding to the predetermined bit value of the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read in step S101 in a predetermined register that can be referred to by the initial value setting circuit 172. May be controlled indirectly. When the CPU 114 sets control data in the initial value setting control register, the initial value setting circuit 172 is stored in the initial value setting register when the random number circuit 113 starts generating random numbers, for example. By referring to the control data and performing an initial value setting operation according to the control data, a start value at startup corresponding to the read value in step S101 can be generated and set in the random number generation circuit 173. .

  After executing one of the processes of steps S105 and S106, the random number circuit 113 determines whether or not the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read in step S101 is based on a value in a predetermined bit (for example, the first and 0th bits). A random number update method is set (step S107). Subsequently, the maximum value among the random number values generated by the random number circuit 113 is set (step S108). For example, in step S108, the CPU 114 can set the maximum random value generated by the random number circuit 113 by setting the random number maximum value setting data read from the ROM 115 in the random number generation circuit 173 of the random number circuit 113. You can do it.

  Thereafter, based on the value in the predetermined bits (for example, the third and second bits) of the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read out in step S101, the second and subsequent rounds in the random number value generated by the random number circuit 113 Initial setting for the start value is performed (step S109). As a specific example, in the process of step S109, control data corresponding to a predetermined bit value of the random number initial setting data (KRSS) is stored in a predetermined register built in the random number circuit 113 or the CPU 114, or a predetermined area of the RAM 116. Thus, the CPU 114 may perform initial setting so that the CPU 114 can refer to the setting related to the start value after the second round in the random value while the timer interrupt process for game control is being executed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a serial communication error interrupt process executed each time an error interrupt occurs in the serial communication circuit 118 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. Here, in the serial communication circuit 118, an overrun error, a noise error, a framing error, and a parity error are set based on the setting in a predetermined bit (for example, the third to 0th bits) of the third register SICL3 included in the serial control register 305. An interrupt request corresponding to the occurrence of an error interrupt factor that turns on a predetermined bit (any one of the 3rd to 0th bits) of the first register SIST1 included in the serial status register 304 when any of the errors occurs Is output. The interrupt request output from the serial communication circuit 118 is transmitted to the reset / interrupt controller 112. When the reset / interrupt controller 112 accepts an interrupt factor as described above, an interrupt that is in an on state at the IRQ terminal provided in the CPU 114. When the request signal is input, the CPU 114 is notified of the occurrence of the interrupt.

  In the serial communication error interrupt process shown in FIG. 43, the CPU 114 first sets the transmission operation unit 302 provided in the serial communication circuit 118 to an unused state (step S31). As a specific example, the CPU 114 sets a predetermined bit (for example, the third bit corresponding to TE) of the second register SICL2 in the serial control register 305 included in the serial communication circuit 118 to “0”, thereby transmitting the transmission operation unit. 302 is set not to be used. Subsequently, the CPU 114 sets the reception operation unit 301 provided in the serial communication circuit 118 to an unused state (step S32). As a specific example, the CPU 114 sets a predetermined bit (for example, the second bit corresponding to RE) of the second register SICL2 in the serial control register 305 included in the serial communication circuit 118 to “0”, thereby receiving the reception operation unit. 301 is set not to be used. Thereafter, for example, after the CPU 114 sets a serial communication error flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 to an ON state (step S33), the serial communication error interrupt process is terminated.

  Further, every time a reception interrupt occurs in the serial communication circuit 118 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 114 executes a predetermined serial reception interrupt process, and in the serial communication circuit 118 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. Each time a transmission interrupt occurs, the CPU 114 may execute a predetermined serial transmission interrupt process.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 114 each time a timer interrupt for controlling the progress of a game is generated in the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 is started, the CPU 114 first saves the internal register (step S41) and then executes a predetermined switch process to input from each switch via the switch circuit 101. The state of the detected signal is determined (step S42). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S43). For example, in the error process of step S43, it is determined whether or not the serial communication error flag is on. If it is on, a predetermined serial communication abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 or the like. Thus, a notification that a serial communication error has occurred is given by either the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of a predetermined notification lamp, or a combination thereof. What should I do? Further, when the serial communication error flag is on in the error processing of step S43, for example, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from a predetermined error release switch provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an on state. If it is in the on state, a predetermined communication error recovery process is executed to initialize the serial communication circuit 118 to recover from the serial communication error, and the serial communication error flag is cleared to turn off. do it. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S44). ).

  Following the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR6 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S45). Next, based on the execution result of the switch processing in step S42, for example, a game ball to be awarded is paid out in accordance with the input of the start winning signal SS1 from the start port switch 22 or the detection signal from the count switch 24 Prize ball processing for setting the number is executed (step S46). Further, the CPU 114 executes main-side reception processing for performing various settings in accordance with the payout notification command received from the payout control board 15 by serial communication (step S47).

  In the main-side reception process in step S47, it is determined whether or not a reception command is stored in the payout reception command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 166, and when it is stored, the reception command is read out. Then, for example, processing corresponding to the type of received command, such as processing for setting or clearing a flag according to the type of the received received command, is executed. When the main side reception process in step S47 is started, it is first determined whether or not the serial communication error flag is on. If it is on, the main side reception process may be terminated as it is. . Thus, when an error occurs in the operation of the serial communication circuit 118, it is possible to control to stop receiving the payout notification command transmitted from the payout control board 15. Further, when the reception command is read from the payout reception command buffer in the main side reception processing in step S47, the exclusive OR of the first byte and the second byte in the reception command is calculated, and the calculated calculation result It is also possible to check whether or not the received command is an appropriate command by determining whether or not is a normal value. In this embodiment, the payout notification command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 is configured to be the second byte by reversing the first byte. As a result of calculating the exclusive OR of the first byte and the second byte, if all the bit values are “1”, it can be determined that the received command is an appropriate command.

  Thereafter, the CPU 114 executes special symbol process processing (step S48). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display operation control or special in the special symbol display device 4 is updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the special winning opening / closing operation in the variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S49). The CPU 114 executes normal symbol process processing to control display operations (for example, lighting and extinguishing of LEDs) in the normal symbol display device 20, and to perform variable display of normal symbols (for example, lighting and blinking) and the like. It is possible to set the tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6.

  Further, the CPU 114 transmits a payout control command from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 by executing a payout command control process (step S50). For example, in the payout command control process, it is determined whether or not a transmission command is stored in the payout transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 166, and when it is stored, it corresponds to the transmission command. Read stored data. Then, the read data is set in the serial communication data register 303 provided in the serial communication circuit 118. When the payout command control process in step S50 is started, it is first determined whether or not the serial communication error flag is on. If it is on, the payout command control process is terminated as it is. Also good. As a result, when an error occurs in the operation of the serial communication circuit 118, it is possible to control to stop sending the payout control command to the payout control board 15. Further, when the data corresponding to the transmission command is set in the serial communication data register 303 in the payout command control processing in step S50, the transmission setting enable flag and the transmission completion flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 are checked. Thus, it may be determined whether the data set is possible, whether the command transmission is completed, or the like.

  After executing the payout command control process in step S50, the CPU 114 transmits the effect control command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the effect command control process (step S51). Thereafter, the contents of the register saved in step S41 are restored (step S52), and the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S48 shown in FIG. 44 as the special symbol process. When the special symbol process shown in FIG. 45 is started, the CPU 114 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is turned on, for example, so that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 forms a start. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a winning opening (step S111). When the game ball wins the start winning opening and the detection signal from the start opening switch 22 is turned on (step S111; Yes), the start winning process is executed (step S112). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is in the off state (step S111; No), the process of step S112 is skipped.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process executed in step S112. In the start winning process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 114 first sets the special figure holding storage number, which is the number of numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination stored in the special figure holding storage unit 161A, to a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, “4”) (step S201). At this time, if the special figure hold storage number is the upper limit value (step S201; Yes), the start detection process by the current winning is invalidated and the start winning process is terminated as it is.

  When the number of special figure hold storage is less than the upper limit value in step S201 (step S201; No), the stored value in the random value register 176 of the random number circuit 113 is read as the random number MR1 for jackpot determination (step S202). For example, in the process of step S202, the output control signal SC is set to an on state by setting predetermined control data to a predetermined bit of an output port included in the input / output port 119, and then input to a predetermined bit of the input port. The numerical value data read out from the random value register 176 is acquired as the random value MR1 by taking in the random value output signal SO to be obtained.

  Subsequently, the random value MR1 read in step S202 is set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 161A (step S203). At this time, the special figure reservation storage number 161A in the special figure reservation storage unit 161A is incremented by 1 and updated (step S204).

  After executing the start winning process as described above, or after determining that the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is OFF in step S111 shown in FIG. Each process of steps S120 to S126 as shown in FIG. 45 is executed according to the value of the special symbol process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. This special symbol normal process is a process for determining whether or not to start a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 based on numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random value MR1 stored in the special symbol storage unit 161A. Etc. The variable display start process in step S121 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “1”. In the variable display start process, a process for setting a fixed special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 and a variable display pattern for the special symbol and the decorative symbol are determined. Includes processing. The variable display control process in step S122 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This variable display control process includes a process of measuring the remaining variable display time in the special figure game by the special symbol display device 4 based on the timer value in the variable display timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 164. Yes. The variable display stop process in step S123 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop process, the special symbol display device 4 derives and displays the confirmed special symbol and ends the variable symbol variable display.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S124 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “4”. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, for example, by setting predetermined control data in an effect transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 166, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Make settings for Further, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening includes an initialization process in the big hit operation such as opening and closing the big winning opening by the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. The special winning opening opening process in step S125 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big prize opening is performed in various processes related to the big hit operation such as opening and closing of the big prize opening by the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, and once in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. It includes processing to check the opening time. Further, in the special winning opening opening process, it is determined whether or not the big hit operation by the special variable winning ball device 7 is finished, and if it is finished, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “6”. The jackpot end process in step S126 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “6”. The jackpot end process includes a process of setting for transmitting a jackpot end command to the effect control board 12 by setting predetermined control data in the effect transmission command buffer, for example.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start time process executed in step S121 of FIG. In the variable display start process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 114 first executes a big hit probability change determination process (step S211). In this big hit probability variation determination process, it is determined whether the display result in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4 is a big hit or a loss, and when it is a big hit, whether it is a probable big hit (first or second certainty big hit) Usually, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit. More specifically, when the CPU 114 starts the big hit probability change determination process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, as shown in FIG. 48, the big hit determination disorder stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” from the special figure hold storage unit 161A. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1 is read (step S601). At this time, the special figure hold storage number is subtracted by 1 and the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the special figure hold storage unit 161A. The numerical data indicating the stored random number value MR1 is shifted up by one entry (step S602).

  Subsequently, the CPU 114 determines whether or not the probability changing flag is on (step S603). If the probability change flag is off (step S603; No), the normal-time big hit determination table shown in FIG. 181 is set (step S604). On the other hand, if the probability changing flag is on (step S603; Yes), the probability changing time shown in FIG. The big hit determination table 182 is set (step S605).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S604 and S605, the display result is determined to be a big hit by determining whether or not the big hit determination random number MR1 read in step S601 matches the big hit determination value data. It is determined whether or not (step S606). If the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S606 (step S606; No), the big hit probability variation determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S606 (step S606; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 is set to the on state (step S607).

  Subsequent to step S607, the CPU 114 determines whether or not the probability changing flag is on (step S608). At this time, if the probability changing flag is off (step S608; No), it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is currently controlled to the normal gaming state, and the display result in the special figure game is a big hit. As a table for determining the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state based on becoming, the normal gaming state determination table 192 shown in FIG. 17A is set (step S609). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is on in step S608 (step S608; Yes), it is determined whether the advantageous release flag is on (step S610).

  If the advantageous release flag is off in step S610 (step S610; No), it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is currently controlled to the first probability variable gaming state, and in the special figure game As a table for determining the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the display result being a jackpot, the first probability variation gaming state determination table 193 shown in FIG. 17B is set (step S611). . If the advantageous release flag is on in step S610 (step S610; Yes), it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is currently controlled to the second probability variable gaming state, and the special game As a table for determining the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the display result in the big hit, a second probability change gaming state determination table 194 shown in FIG. S612).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S609, S611, and S612, numerical data indicating the gaming state determination random value MR4 updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted (step S613). Then, by determining whether or not the random value MR4 read in step S613 matches the normal jackpot determination value data, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to the normal gaming state. This is performed (step S614). At this time, if the random value MR4 matches the normal jackpot determination value data (step S614; Yes), the game control flag is set in response to the determination that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the normal gaming state. The probability variation confirmation flag provided in the unit 163 is cleared and turned off (step S615), and after the advantageous release confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step S616), the big hit probability variation determination process is terminated.

  If the random value MR4 does not match the normal jackpot determination value data in step S614 (step S614; No), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the probability changing gaming state (first or second probability changing gaming state). Then, the probability variation confirmation flag is set to the on state (step S617). At this time, it is further determined whether or not the random value MR4 matches the first probability variation jackpot determination value data (step S618). If the random value MR4 matches the first probability variation jackpot determination value data (step S618; Yes), it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the first certain variation gaming state among the probability variation gaming states. Corresponding to step S616, the process proceeds to step S616, where the advantageous release determination flag is cleared and turned off, and then the big hit probability change determination process ends. On the other hand, if the random value MR4 does not match the first probability variation jackpot determination value data in Step S618 (Step S618; No), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is changed to the second certain variation gaming state among the probability variation gaming states. In response to the determination that control is to be performed, the advantageous release determination flag is set to the on state (step S619), and then the big hit probability change determination process is terminated.

  After the big hit probability change determination process as described above is executed, a display result setting process is executed (step S212 in FIG. 47). 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the display result setting process executed in step S212 of FIG. In this display result setting process, the CPU 114 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S631 in FIG. 49).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S631 (step S631; No), the variable display result in the special symbol game of this time is selected from the losing symbols included in a plurality of types of special symbols that can be displayed on the special symbol display device 4. The determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as is determined (step S632). For example, the CPU 114 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a special symbol for determination when lost, which is updated by the random number circuit 113, and refers to a fixed special symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 115 or the like. Any one of the plurality of lost symbols may be selected and determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  Following the process of step S632, the CPU 114 determines whether or not the decorative symbol variable display mode is to be reached (step S633). For example, the CPU 114 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for reach determination updated by the random number circuit 113 and the like, and refers to a reach determination table stored in advance in the ROM 115 or the like to variably display decorative symbols. What is necessary is just to determine whether an aspect is made reach. Corresponding to the determination result in step S633, for example, display result notification to the effect control board 12 such as setting predetermined control data in the effect transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 166. Settings for transmitting the command are made (step S634). As a result, if it is determined in step S633 that the normal loss is not achieved, the display result notification # 1 command 9001h is transmitted. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S633 that reach is to be achieved, a display result notification # 2 command 9002h is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S634, it is specified whether or not the determination result in step S633 is reach (step S635). At this time, if the reach is specified (step S635; Yes), the reach flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 is set to the on state (step S636). If it is determined in step S635 that the determination result is not reach (step S635; No), the process of step S636 is skipped.

  If the big hit flag is ON in step S631 (step S631; Yes), “3” or “3” defined as the big hit symbol among a plurality of types of special symbols that can be displayed on the special symbol display device 4 is displayed. One of the special symbols indicating "7" is determined as a confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result in the current special symbol game (step S637). For example, in the process of step S637, it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation flag is on. If the probability variation confirmation flag is on, the special symbol indicating “7” corresponding to the probability variation big hit is determined as the certain confirmation symbol. If it is off, the special symbol indicating “3” is determined as the confirmed special symbol corresponding to the normal big hit. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation flag is on (step S638). At this time, if the probability variation confirmation flag is off (step S638; No), the type of display result at the time of big hit is determined as “normal big hit” (step S639). Then, for example, a command for display result notification # 3 corresponding to “normal jackpot” such as setting control data corresponding to the type of display result “normal jackpot” determined in step S639 in the transmission command buffer for production. Settings for transmitting 9003h to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S640).

  If the probability change confirmation flag is on in step S638 (step S638; Yes), it is determined whether or not the advantageous release confirmation flag is on (step S641). At this time, if the advantageous release confirmation flag is off (step S641; No), the type of display result at the time of big hit is determined to be “first positive variation big hit” (step S642). Subsequently, an advantageous release re-lottery execution determination table 186 shown in FIG. 14B is set as a table for determining whether or not to execute the advantageous release re-lottery effect (step S643). Also, numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determining the advantageous opening re-lottery effect execution updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted (step S644). Then, based on the random value MR6 extracted in step S644, referring to the advantageous open re-lottery execution determination table 186 set in step S643, it is determined whether or not the random value MR6 matches the effect execution determination value data. Is performed (step S645).

  If the random value MR6 matches the effect execution determination value data in step S645 (step S645; Yes), for example, by setting control data corresponding to the determination result in step S645 in the effect transmission command buffer, etc. The display result notification # 4 command 9004h is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in response to the type of the display result being "first probability variation big hit" and executing the advantageous opening re-lottery effect. For this purpose (step S646). On the other hand, when the random value MR6 does not match the effect execution determination value data in step S645 (step S645; No), for example, control data corresponding to the determination result in step S645 is stored in the effect transmission command buffer. In response to the fact that the type of the display result is “first probable big hit” and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is not executed by setting the display result notification # 5 command 9005h, the effect control board 12 Is set for transmission (step S647).

  If the advantageous release confirmation flag is turned on in step S641 (step S641; Yes), the type of display result at the time of big hit is determined to be “second probability variation big hit” (step S648 in FIG. 50). Subsequently, an advantageous release re-lottery execution determination table 186 shown in FIG. 14B is set as a table for determining whether or not to execute the advantageous release re-lottery effect (step S649). Also, numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determining advantageous opening re-lottery effect execution updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted (step S650). Then, based on the random value MR6 extracted in step S650, with reference to the advantageous open re-lottery execution determination table 186 set in step S649, it is determined whether or not the random value MR6 matches the effect execution determination value data. Is performed (step S651).

  If the random value MR6 matches the effect execution determination value data in step S651 (step S651; Yes), for example, by setting control data corresponding to the determination result in step S651 in the effect transmission command buffer, etc. The display result notification # 6 command 9006h is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in response to the type of the display result being “second probability variation big hit” and executing the advantageous opening re-lottery effect. For this purpose (step S652). On the other hand, if the random value MR6 does not match the effect execution determination value data in step S651 (step S651; No), for example, control data corresponding to the determination result in step S651 is stored in the effect transmission command buffer. In response to the fact that the type of the display result is “second probable big hit” and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is not executed by setting the display result notification # 7 command 9007h, the effect control board 12 Is set for transmission (step S653).

  Thereafter, the CPU 114 stores in the confirmed special symbol storage unit 162 data that can identify the special symbol determined as the confirmed special symbol in step S632 or step S637 of FIG. 49 (for example, data indicating the symbol number of the special symbol). The determined special symbol thus determined is saved (step S654), and the display result setting process is terminated.

  After executing the display result setting process as described above, the variable display pattern setting process is executed (step S213 in FIG. 47). FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display pattern setting process executed in step S213 of FIG. In this variable display pattern setting process, the CPU 114 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S671).

  When the big hit flag is on in step S671 (step S671; Yes), the probability variation re-lottery execution determination shown in FIG. The table 185 is set (step S672). Also, numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for probability change re-drawing effect execution determination updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted (step S673). Then, for example, based on the random value MR5 extracted in step S673, referring to the probability variation re-lottery execution determination table 185 set in step S672, it is determined whether or not the random value MR5 matches the effect execution determination value data. By doing so, the presence / absence of the probability variation re-drawing effect is determined (step S674). At this time, if the random value MR5 matches the effect execution determination value data, it is determined that there is a probability variation re-lottery effect. It may be determined that there is no. When the type of display result is “normal jackpot”, it is determined that there is always a probabilistic re-lottery effect regardless of whether or not the random value MR5 matches the effect execution determination value data. May be. Subsequently, a big hit pattern determination table 188 shown in FIG. 16A is set as a table for selecting a variable display pattern (step S675).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S671 (step S671; No), it is determined whether or not the reach flag is on (step S676). If the reach flag is on (step S676; Yes), the reach / loss pattern determination table 189 shown in FIG. 16B is set as a table for selecting a variable display pattern (step S677). At this time, the reach lose flag is cleared and turned off (step S678).

  If the reach flag is off in step S676 (step S676; No), it is determined whether or not the probability changing flag is on (step S679). At this time, if the probability changing flag is off (step S679; No), the normal loss pattern determination table 190 shown in FIG. 16C is set as a table for selecting the variable display pattern (step S680). . On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is on in step S679 (step S679; Yes), the probability variation pattern determination table 191 shown in FIG. 16D is set as a table for selecting the variable display pattern. (Step S681).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S675, S678, S680, and S681, the random value MR3 for variable display pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted (step S682). Then, referring to the set pattern determination table based on the random value MR3 extracted in step S682, the variable display pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols is determined (step S683). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a variable display start command corresponding to the variable display pattern determined in step S683 is performed (step S684). For example, if the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is lost, the variable display pattern determined in step S683 is referred to by referring to the variable display pattern table 187 shown in FIG. EXT data corresponding to “no lottery effect” is specified. For example, the CPU 114 performs setting such as setting predetermined control data in the effect transmission command buffer so that the variable display start command including the specified EXT data is transmitted to the effect control board 12. When the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a big hit, by referring to the variable display pattern table 187 shown in FIG. 15 and the like, the variable display pattern determined in step S683 and the step S674 are displayed. EXT data corresponding to the presence / absence of the probability variation re-lottery effect determined ("with probability variation re-lottery effect" or "without probability variation re-lottery effect") is determined. For example, the CPU 114 performs setting such as setting predetermined control data in the effect transmission command buffer so that the variable display start command including the specified EXT data is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Following the processing of step S684, the timer initial value corresponding to the total variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol as the display result is displayed in the game control timer setting unit 164. The variable display timer is set (step S685). For example, in the process of step S685, the total variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display pattern determined in step S683 is specified. A timer initial value corresponding to the total variable display time specified in this way is set in the variable display timer.

  After executing the variable display pattern setting process as described above, the probability variation end determination process is executed (step S214 in FIG. 47). In this probability variation end determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on. If it is off, the probability variation end determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change count value, which is the value of the probability change counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 165, is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated probability variation count value has become a predetermined probability variation end determination value (for example, “0”), and if it is a value other than the probability variation end determination value, the probability variation end determination process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the probability variation count value becomes the probability variation end determination value, the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability variation counter is cleared to reset the count value to “0”. To complete the probability change gaming state. At this time, the advantageous release flag is also cleared and turned off.

  Subsequent to the probability variation end determination process in step S214, the special symbol display device 4 starts variable display of the special symbol, for example, the CPU 114 starts the lighting / extinguishing operation of each segment or each dot in the special symbol display device 4. For this purpose (step S215). At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display control process (step S216), and the variable display start time process is ended.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S126 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 52, the CPU 114 first performs setting for transmitting a jackpot end command to the effect control board 12, for example, by setting predetermined control data in the effect transmission command buffer. (Step S231). Then, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S232).

  Following the process of step S232, the CPU 114 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmation flag is on (step S233). At this time, if the probability change confirmation flag is on (step S233; Yes), after the probability change confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step S234), the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (first step). In response to being controlled to 1 or 2nd probability variation game state), the probability variation flag is set to ON state (step S235), and the probability variation counter initial value (for example, “ 100 ") is set (step S236). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the advantageous release confirmation flag is on (step S237). If the advantageous release confirmation flag is on (step S237; Yes), the advantageous release confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step S238), and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the probability-changing gaming state. The advantageous release flag is set to the on state in response to being controlled to the second probability variation gaming state (step S239).

  When the probability change confirmation flag is OFF in step S233 (step S233; No), the probability change flag is cleared corresponding to the fact that the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state. As a result, the counter is turned off (step S240), and the probability variation counter is cleared to initialize the count value to “0” (step S241). When the advantageous release determination flag is off in step 237 (step S237; No), after executing the process of step S241, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state, Or corresponding to being controlled to the 1st probability change game state of probability change game states, it will be in an OFF state by clearing an advantageous release flag (step S242). After executing one of the processes in steps S239 and S242, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” (step S243), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S49 of FIG. 44 as normal symbol process processing. When the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 44 is started, the CPU 114 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on, for example, by passing the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area. It is determined whether or not the sphere has passed (step S141). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S141; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S142). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S141; No), the process of step S142 is skipped.

  In the process at the time of passing through the gate in step S142, the normal figure reserved storage number, which is the number of numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for normal hit determination stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 161B, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)). At this time, if the normal figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value, the start detection by the passing of the current game ball is invalidated, and the process at the time of passing the gate is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the normal figure reserved storage number is less than the upper limit, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for normal hit determination updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted, and the numerical value indicating the extracted random value MR2 is extracted. The data is set at the head of the empty entry in the normal diagram hold storage unit 161B.

  Thereafter, the CPU 114 executes the following steps S150 to S154 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163. The normal symbol normal process in step S150 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In the normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for normal hit determination stored in the normal symbol holding storage unit 161B. Includes processing. The normal symbol determination process in step S151 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. This normal symbol determination processing includes processing for determining whether or not the display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is “winning”. The normal symbol variation process in step S152 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol is changed by controlling lighting, blinking, coloring, etc. of the normal symbol display device 20 until the variable symbol variable display time elapses. The normal symbol stop process in step S153 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the lighting operation and the like in the normal symbol display device 20 are controlled to output the display result in the normal symbol game. If the normal hit flag is on, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “4”, while if the normal hit flag is off, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “0”. The start winning opening / closing process in step S154 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “4”. This start winning opening / closing process includes a process for setting the start winning opening to be changed from the normal opening to the expanded opening by controlling the tilting of the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol determination process executed in step S151 of FIG. In the normal symbol determination process shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 114 first reads numerical data indicating the normal hit determination random number value MR2 stored in correspondence with the reservation number “1” from the normal diagram storage unit 161B ( Step S251). At this time, while subtracting 1 from the number of the normal map hold storage number, the normal map hold storage unit 161B adds the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”). The numerical data indicating the stored random number value MR2 is shifted upward by one entry (step S252).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the advantageous release flag is on (step S253). At this time, if the advantageous release flag is off (step S253; No), FIG. 13A shows a table to be referred to for determining whether or not the display result in the normal game is “winning”. The normal opening normal hit determination table 183 is set (step S254). On the other hand, if the advantageous release flag is on (step S253; Yes), the table shown in FIG. 13B is used as a table to be referred to in order to determine whether or not the display result in the normal game is “winning”. An opening normal hit determination table 184 is set (step S255).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S254 and S255, the display result is obtained by determining whether or not the random number MR2 for normal hit determination read in step S251 matches the normal hit determination value data. It is determined whether or not “winning” is achieved (step S256). If the random value MR2 matches the normal hit determination value data in step S256 (step S256; Yes), the normal hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 is set to the on state (step S257). On the other hand, if the random number MR2 does not match the normal hit determination value data in step S256 (step S256; No), the process of step S257 is skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the advantageous release flag is on (step S258). If the advantageous release flag is off (step S258; No), the variable display time from the start of the change of the normal symbol to the output of the display result in the current normal game is a predetermined value corresponding to the normal release time. Time (for example, 30 seconds) is set (step S259). On the other hand, if the advantageous release flag is turned on in step S258 (step S258; Yes), the variable display time from the start of the change of the normal symbol to the output of the display result in the current normal game is displayed. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) corresponding to the advantageous opening is set to be different from the variable display time corresponding to the normal opening (step S260). At this time, by setting the predetermined time corresponding to the advantageous opening time to be shorter than the predetermined time corresponding to the normal opening time until the display result is output after the normal symbol variation is started in the normal drawing game The time is shortened. As a result, the period during which the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6 is not tilted and controlled during the normal opening is shorter than that during the normal opening, and the period during which the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is not tilt-controlled is shortened. Can be advantageous to the person. After executing one of the processes in steps S259 and S260, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “2” (step S261), and then the normal symbol determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the start port opening / closing process executed in step S154 of FIG. In the start port opening / closing process shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 114 first determines whether or not the opening / closing setting completion flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 163 is on (step S271). The open / close setting completion flag is set to an on state when a process of step S275 described later is executed.

  If the open / close setting completion flag is off in step S271 (step S271; No), it is determined whether or not the advantageous release flag is on (step S272). At this time, if the advantageous release flag is ON (step S272; Yes), for example, predetermined control data corresponding to the advantageous release state in the output port buffer corresponding to the solenoid 81 that drives the movable blade of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is provided. Is set to transmit an operation signal for advantageous opening (step S273). For example, the operation signal for the advantageous opening is an operation signal for enlarging and opening the start winning opening with the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 tilted twice for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Good.

  When the advantageous release flag is OFF in step S272 (step S272; No), for example, by setting predetermined control data corresponding to the normal release in the output port buffer corresponding to the solenoid 81, etc. The setting for transmitting the operation signal is performed (step S274). For example, the normal opening operation signal is an operation signal for enlarging and opening the start winning opening with the movable blade piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 tilted once until a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) elapses. I just need it. In this way, at the time of advantageous opening, by increasing the period and number of times that the starting winning opening is expanded and opened compared to the case of normal opening, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting winning opening, and the advantageous opening time is more than the normal opening time. This can be advantageous for the player. After executing either of the processes of steps S273 and S274, the opening / closing setting completion flag is set to the on state (step S275), and then the start winning opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the open / close setting completion flag is ON in step S271 (step S271; Yes), whether or not the period for opening and closing the start winning opening by controlling the tilting of the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6 is completed. Is determined (step S276). At this time, if the period for opening and closing the start winning opening has not ended (step S276; No), the start opening and closing process is ended. On the other hand, if the period for opening and closing the start winning opening ends in step S276 (step S276; Yes), the open / close setting completion flag is cleared and turned off (step S277), and then the normal hit flag is cleared and turned off. At the same time (step S278), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “0” (step S279), and then the start port opening / closing process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 10, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the CPU 131 executes an effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56 is started, the CPU 131 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S61), clears the RAM 133, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) (not shown) is performed. Here, in the initialization process in step S61, the effect mode flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is cleared and the value thereof is initialized to “0”. Subsequently, the CPU 131 performs storage area setting command processing for issuing a command for setting the storage area in the image element temporary storage memory 155 provided in the VDP 141 to the fixed address area 155A and the automatic transfer area 155B as shown in FIG. Execute (Step S62).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage area setting command process executed in step S62 of FIG. In this storage area setting command process, the CPU 131 reads out the STADD setting data and the ENADD setting data from the ROM 132 as data for setting the storage area to be the automatic transfer area 155B as shown in FIG. Steps S161 and S162). Then, based on the setting data read out in steps S161 and S162, a display control command serving as a storage area setting command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 included in the display control unit 121 (step S163).

  After executing the storage area setting command processing as described above, the image element data set so that the display frequency in the image display device 5 is increased in the storage area serving as the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155. Is executed in advance (step S63 in FIG. 56).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance transfer command process executed in step S63 of FIG. In this advance transfer command process, the CPU 131 first sets the advance transfer setting table 211 corresponding to the effect mode flag (step S171). For example, when the value of the effect mode flag is “0”, the advance operation shown in FIG. 28 (B) corresponds to the effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the first effect mode # 1. The transfer setting table 211A is determined as a table used for transmitting a pre-transfer command to the VDP 141 included in the display control unit 121. On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, corresponding to the fact that the effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second effect mode # 2, FIG. Is determined as a table used for transmitting a pre-transfer command to the VDP 141.

  Subsequently, the CPU 131 clears the advance transfer counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit of the RAM 133, and initializes the advance transfer count value, which is the count value, to “0” (step S172). Then, the number of processes is set by reading the table data of the advance transfer setting table 211 corresponding to the advance transfer count value being “0” (step S173).

  Thereafter, the CPU 131 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S174). Then, by reading the table data of the advance transfer setting table 211 corresponding to the advance transfer count value updated in step S174, a read address indicating the read position of the image element data in the CGROM 142 is specified (step S175).

  Further, the CPU 131 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S176), and reads the table data of the advance transfer setting table 211 corresponding to the updated count value, thereby temporarily storing the image elements. A write address indicating a write position in which image element data is temporarily stored in the storage area serving as the fixed address area 155A of the memory 155 is specified (step S177).

  Further, the CPU 131 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S178), and reads the table data of the advance transfer setting table 211 corresponding to the updated count value, thereby reducing the transfer data amount. Specify (step S179). Based on the read address, write address, and transfer data amount thus specified, the CPU 131 creates a pre-transfer command and transmits it to the VDP 141 included in the display control unit 121 (step S180). At this time, the number of processes is updated, for example, by subtracting 1 (step S181).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of processes updated in step S181 has reached a predetermined end determination value (for example, “0”) (step S182). At this time, if the number of processes has not reached the end determination value (step S182; No), the process returns to step S174. On the other hand, if the number of processes reaches the end determination value (step S182; Yes), the pre-transfer counter is cleared, the count value is initialized to “0” (step S183), and the pre-transfer command process Exit.

  As described above, after the pre-transfer command process is executed in step S63 of FIG. 56, the timer interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is monitored, and whether or not the flag is turned on. Is determined (step S64). If no timer interrupt occurs and the timer interrupt flag is off (step S64; No), loop processing is executed until a timer interrupt occurs. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is turned on due to the occurrence of the timer interrupt (step S64; Yes), the flag is cleared and turned off (step S65), and then the effect control transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. Command analysis processing for analyzing the command is executed (step S66).

  Following the command analysis process in step S66, the CPU 131 executes an effect control process process (step S67). In this effect control process, various effects are produced by the display of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Settings for execution are made. Then, by performing the effect side random value update process (step S68), various random values counted by the random number circuit 134 and the like on the effect control board 12 side are updated. After performing the effect random number update process in step S68, the process returns to step S64.

  In addition, in the effect control microcomputer 120, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal is generated, the CPU 131 automatically sets the interrupt prohibited state. It is preferable to issue (DI command).

  In response to the interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on, the CPU 131 executes a predetermined command reception interrupt process, for example. In this command reception interrupt process, a predetermined input for receiving a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13 among the input ports included in the input / output port 135 provided in the production control microcomputer 120. A control signal as an effect control command is taken from the port. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect side reception command buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 133. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production side reception command buffer. Thereafter, the CPU 131 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S67 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 59, for example, the following processes of steps S190 to S195 are executed according to the value of the effect control process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133.

  The variable display start command reception waiting process in step S190 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “0”. The variable display start command reception waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a variable display start command is received from the main board 11. Contains.

  The variable display control setting process in step S191 is executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “1”. This variable display control setting process performs various effect operations including variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in response to the special symbols being variably displayed in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4. In order to perform the process, for example, a process for selecting a variable display pattern or a display result corresponding to the type of display result from among a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 221 as shown in FIG. Etc.

  The variable symbol display process in step S192 is executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “2”. In this process, the CPU 131 generates presentation control data such as display control data, audio control data, and lamp control data from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the presentation control timer provided in the presentation control timer setting unit of the RAM 133. read out. Various effects during variable display of decorative symbols, such as display control of the image display device 5, audio output control of the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc., according to the effect control data read at this time. Control is performed. Then, when the effect control data corresponding to the end of the variable display of the decorative design is read from the effect control pattern, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start command reception waiting time is set in the effect control timer. Thereafter, the countdown operation of the effect control timer is started, and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the big hit start waiting process.

  The big hit start waiting process in step S193 is executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “3”. In this process, the CPU 131 determines whether or not a jackpot start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the jackpot start command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the jackpot effect process, based on the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is a jackpot. . On the other hand, if the effect control timer times out without receiving the jackpot start command from the main board 11, the effect control process flag of the effect control process flag is determined based on the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is lost. The value is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process of step S194 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this process, for example, the CPU 131 controls the display operation in the image display device 5 to display an image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state, or controls the sound output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R to play the sound corresponding to the jackpot gaming state. Various effects control in the big hit gaming state is performed such that the lighting / extinguishing operation of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to turn on / off / blink in accordance with the big hit gaming state. Then, in response to the fact that the round game executed in the big hit game state has reached the end of the final round (for example, the fifteenth round), the big hit end command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, etc. The value of the process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process. The big hit end effect process in step S195 is executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the jackpot end effect process, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state is notified by displaying an image on the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or lighting the game effect lamp 9. The process which controls the production | presentation operation | movement for this is included.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start command reception waiting process executed in step S190 of FIG. In this variable display start command reception waiting process, the CPU 131 first determines whether or not a variable display start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S291).

  If no variable display start command is received in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is on (step S292). Here, the demonstration display flag is set to an on state by executing a process of step S295 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing one of the processes of steps S304 and S307. It becomes.

  If the demonstration display flag is off in step S292 (step S292; No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined demonstration display waiting time has elapsed (step S293). Here, the demonstration display waiting time is a demonstration screen composed of demonstration images from the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol that results in the display result being lost is completed or the timing that the presentation operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is completed. Is a predetermined time set in advance as a standby time until the image display device 5 starts the display. At this time, if the demonstration display waiting time has not elapsed (step S293; No), the variable display start command reception waiting process is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S293 that the demonstration display waiting time has elapsed (step S293; Yes), the CPU 131 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP 141 and starts the demonstration screen display. The setting for making this is performed (step S294). For example, the CPU 131 uses the start address in the image data for displaying the demo screen stored in the CGROM 142 as the read address, and the address of the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the upper left coordinate on the screen of the image display device 5 as the write address. The fixed address designation display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141. With such a start display setting of the demo screen, the image display device 5 displays a demo screen as shown in FIG. 61, for example, and can notify the player to operate the operation switch 40.

  In response to the demonstration screen display being started by the setting in step S294, the demonstration display flag is set to the on state (step S295). At this time, the advance transfer command process is executed in the same manner as in step S63 of FIG. 56 (step S296). Thereby, the image element set to increase the display frequency in response to the establishment of a transfer condition that is predetermined in accordance with the progress of the game, that is, display start of the demonstration screen in the image display device 5 Data can be commanded to be transferred from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155.

  If the demonstration display flag is on in step S292 (step S292; Yes), or after the processing of step S296 is executed, is the operation switch signal that is a detection signal from the operation switch 40 turned on? It is determined whether or not (step S297). Here, the operation switch signal is turned on when the operation switch 40 detects a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation). If the operation switch signal is on in step S297 (step S297; Yes), settings for switching the production mode are performed. That is, it is determined whether the value of the production mode flag is “0” or “1” (step S298). If the value of the production mode flag is “0” (step S298; “0”). While updating to “1” (step S299), if “1” (step S208; “1”), updating to “0” (step S300).

  After executing the process of step S299 or step S300, the advance transfer command process is executed in the same manner as in step S63 of FIG. 56 (step S301). Thereby, the image element data set so as to increase the display frequency in response to the determination of a new effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by switching the effect mode, is temporarily stored from the CGROM 142 to the image element data. A transfer can be commanded to the fixed address area 155A of the memory 155.

  When the operation switch signal is OFF in step S297 (step S297; No), after executing the process of step S301, it is determined whether or not the predetermined demonstration display period has ended (step S302). At this time, if the demo display period has ended (step S302; Yes), settings for ending the demo screen display are made (step S303), and the demo display flag is cleared and turned off (step S303). S304). In step S <b> 303, for example, the CPU 131 may transmit a display control command for initializing display on the image display device 5 to the VDP 141. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S302 that the demonstration display period has not ended (step S302; No), the processes in steps S303 and S304 are skipped, and the variable display start command reception waiting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S291 that a variable display start command has been received (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (step S305). At this time, if the demonstration display flag is on (step S305; Yes), setting for terminating the demonstration screen display is performed (step S306), and the demonstration display flag is cleared and turned off (step S306). S307). On the other hand, when the demonstration display flag is OFF in step S305 (step S305; No), the processing of steps S306 and S307 is skipped. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display control setting process (step S308), and the variable display start command reception waiting process is ended.

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the variable display control setting process executed in step S191 of FIG. In this variable display control setting process, the CPU 131 first identifies the type of display result from, for example, stored data in a display result storage unit provided in the RAM 133, and the type of the identified display result is a big hit (ie, “normally” It is determined whether or not any one of “big hit”, “first positive variation big hit” and “second positive change big hit” (step S321 in FIG. 62).

  If the type of display result is not big hit in step S321 (step S321; No), for example, the variable display pattern is specified from the stored data in the variable display pattern storage unit provided in the RAM 133, and the specified variable display is performed. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a reach pattern (step S322). At this time, if the specified variable display pattern is a reach pattern (step S322; Yes), a definite decorative symbol for the reach-losing combination is determined (step S323).

  For example, in the process of step S323, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined decorative design that is updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and the left determined decorative that is stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol that is the fixed decorative symbol to be derived and displayed on the “left” variable display unit in the image display device 5 is determined. Further, it is determined that the decorative symbol having the same symbol number as the left fixed decorative symbol is set as the right fixed decorative symbol which is the fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “right” variable display unit in the image display device 5, and left A decorative symbol having a symbol number different from that of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined as a medium fixed decorative symbol that is a fixed decorative symbol that is derived and displayed on the “medium” variable display unit in the image display device 5. As a specific example of the process of determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium-decorative decorative symbol updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and stores it in the ROM 132 or the like in advance. The added value for the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol is specified by referring to the stored medium determined decorative symbol determination table. Then, if the added value specified at this time is a value other than “0”, the specified added value is added to the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol to determine the medium determined decorative symbol. On the other hand, when the specified added value is “0”, an arbitrary value (for example, “1”) is added to the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol, thereby determining the medium determined decorative symbol.

  When the variable display pattern specified in step S322 is not a reach pattern (step S322; No), based on the determination that the variable display pattern is a normal loss pattern, the variable display result of the decorative design in the image display device 5 As a result, a fixed decorative symbol of the normal lose combination is determined (step S324). For example, in the process of step S324, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined decorative design that is updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and stores the left determined decorative that is stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. The left determined decorative design is determined by referring to the design determination table. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating the random value for determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and referring to the medium-decorated decorative symbol determining table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like The addition value for the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol is specified. By adding the added value specified at this time to the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol, the medium determined decorative symbol is determined. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined decorative design that is updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and referring to a right determined decorative design determining table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. The addition value for the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol is specified. The right determined decorative symbol is determined by adding the added value specified at this time to the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol. When the added value specified by referring to the right determined decorative symbol determination table is “0”, an arbitrary value (for example, “1”) is added to the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol, so that the right What is necessary is just to determine a fixed decoration design. Alternatively, the right determined decorative design determination table may be configured such that the added value specified by referring to the right determined decorative design determination table does not include “0”. For example, the right determined decorative design determination table only needs to be configured from numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined decorative design and setting data that associates the added values “1” to “7”.

  Further, when the type of display result is a big hit in step S321 (step S321; Yes), for example, the presence or absence of the probability variation re-lottering effect is specified from the stored data in the variable display pattern storage unit provided in the RAM 133, It is determined whether there is a probable re-drawing effect (step S325 in FIG. 63). At this time, if there is no probability variation re-drawing effect (step S325; No), it is determined whether or not the type of the display result is a normal jackpot (step S326). If it is determined in step S325 that there is a probability variation re-drawing effect (step S325; Yes), or if it is determined in step S326 that the type of display result is a normal jackpot (step S326; Yes), As a result of variable display of the decorative symbols in the image display device 5, a determined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is determined (step S327). For example, in step S327, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and refers to a normal jackpot symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. By doing so, a fixed decorative pattern that is usually a big hit combination is determined.

  If it is determined in step S326 that the type of display result is not normally a big hit (step S326; No), for example, the presence / absence of an advantageous open re-lottery effect is determined from the stored data in the display result storage unit provided in the RAM 133, for example. It is determined and it is determined whether there is an advantageous opening re-lottery effect (step S328). At this time, if there is no advantageous opening re-lottery effect (step S328; No), it is determined whether or not the type of display result is the first probability variation big hit (step S329). If it is determined in step S328 that there is an advantageous opening re-lottery effect (step S328; Yes), or if it is determined in step S329 that the type of display result is the first probability variation big hit (step S329; Yes) As a variable display result of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5, a final decorative symbol of the first probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S330). For example, in step S330, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and a first probability variable big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. , Etc., to determine a definite decorative symbol that becomes the first probability variation jackpot combination.

  If it is determined in step S329 that the type of display result is not the first probability variation big hit (step S329; No), the final decorative symbol of the second probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S331). For example, in step S331, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated on the side of the effect control board 12, and a second probability variable big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. , Etc., to determine a definite decorative symbol that becomes the second probability variation jackpot combination.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S323 and S324 shown in FIG. 62 and the processes of steps S327, S330 and S331 shown in FIG. The confirmed decorative design is saved by storing it in the determined decorative design storage unit (step S332 in FIG. 62). Subsequently, as in step S321, it is determined whether the type of display result is a big hit or a loss (step S333). And if it is determined that it is a big hit (step S333; Yes), the big hit time notice determination shown in FIG. 24 (B) is used as a table for determining the presence / absence of the advance notice execution and the mode of the notice effect when it is executed. The table 202 is set (step S334). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a loss (step S333; No), FIG. 24A shows a table for determining the presence / absence of the advance notice execution and the form of the advance notice effect at the time of execution. A lost time notice determination table 201 is set (step S335). After executing one of the processes of steps S334 and S335, numerical data indicating the random number value SR1 for notice determination updated by the random number circuit 134 or the like is extracted (step S336), and the notice is made based on the extracted random number value SR1. The pattern is determined (step S337).

  After performing the process of step S337, the effect control pattern is determined (step S338). For example, in step S338, the CPU 131 displays an effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display pattern specified from the storage data of the variable display pattern storage unit provided in the RAM 133 and the notice pattern determined in step S337. The pattern is selected from a plurality of types of effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 221 as shown in FIG. 29 (A), and is determined as a pattern for controlling the effect operation during the variable display of decorative symbols. At this time, the CPU 131 determines whether the value of the effect mode flag is “0” or “1”. If it is “0”, the CPU 131 corresponds to the first effect mode # 1 in FIG. The effect control pattern is selected using the effect control pattern table 221A shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, the effect control pattern is selected using the effect control pattern table 221B shown in FIG. 29B corresponding to the second effect mode # 2. I do. And the timer initial value corresponding to an effect control pattern is set to an effect control timer (step S339). For example, in the process of step S339, the CPU 131 specifies the effect control timer setting value shown in the head area of the effect control pattern as shown in FIG. 30, and sets the specified timer setting value as the timer initial value in the effect control timer. do it. Subsequently, for example, the CPU 131 sends a control signal serving as a predetermined display control command from the output port included in the input / output port 135 to the display control unit 121 based on the effect control data read from the effect control pattern. The image display device 5 is set to start variable display of decorative symbols (step S340). At this time, by outputting a voice control command to the sound control unit 122 or sending a lamp control command to the lamp control unit 123, a voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a game effect lamp Control of various effects such as lighting / extinguishing operation at 9 is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the process during variable symbol display (step S341), and the variable display control setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable symbol display process executed in step S192 of FIG. In the symbol variable display process, the CPU 131 first updates the effect control timer value, which is a value in the effect control timer, by subtracting, for example, 1 (step S351). Then, whether or not the effect control timer value updated in step S351 matches any of the effect control timer determination values # 1, # 2,..., #N included in the effect control pattern as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S352). At this time, if it matches any of the timer determination values (step S352; Yes), display control data, sound control data, lamp control data stored in the production control pattern corresponding to the determination value determined to match. Are read out (step S353). Then, based on the display control data read in step S353, it is determined whether it is the display update timing in the image display device 5 (step S354).

  If it is the display update timing in step S354 (step S354; Yes), predetermined display update command processing is executed (step S355). On the other hand, when it is not the display update timing (step S354; No), the process of step S355 is skipped. Subsequently, a voice or lamp control command corresponding to the read data in step S353 is sent (step S356).

  When it is determined in step S352 that none of the production control timer determination values # 1, # 2,..., #N matches (step S352; No), after the process of step S356 is executed, It is determined whether or not the read data in step S353 is a predetermined end code, or whether or not the effect control timer value updated in step S351 has reached a predetermined value (eg, “0”). It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 by the determination (step S357). At this time, if it is not the end timing of variable display (step S357; No), the variable symbol display process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S357 that it is the end timing of variable display (step S357; Yes), for example, the variable display count value that is the value of the variable display counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit of the RAM 133. Is updated by adding 1 or the like (step S358). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable display count value updated in step S358 has reached a predetermined advance transfer execution determination value (eg, “100”) (step S359).

  If the advance transfer execution determination value has been reached in step S359 (step S359; Yes), the advance transfer command process is executed in the same manner as in step S63 in FIG. 56 (step S360). As a result, the display frequency corresponds to the fact that the predetermined transfer condition corresponding to the progress of the game that the variable display count of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 has reached the advance transfer determination value is satisfied. The image element data set to be high can be instructed to be transferred from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155. At this time, initialization such as clearing the variable display number counter and setting the count value to “0” is performed (step S361). If the advance transfer execution determination value has not been reached in step S359 (step S359; No), the processes in steps S360 and S361 are skipped.

  Thereafter, a predetermined initial value for waiting for receiving the big hit start command is set in the effect control timer (step S362), and the effect control process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the big hit start waiting process (step S362). S363), the variable symbol display process is terminated.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the display update command process executed in step S355 of FIG. In this display update command process, the CPU 131 first makes a notice that an image display as a notice effect can be executed, for example, by referring to display control data read from the effect control pattern based on the timer value in the effect control timer. It is determined whether or not it is the display period (step S691). At this time, if it is the notice display period (step S691; Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice start timing is reached based on the effect control timer value, the display control data read from the effect control pattern, and the like (step S692). ).

  If it is the start timing of the advance notice in step S692 (step S692; Yes), it corresponds to the effect image used in each of the advance notice patterns of the advance notice A to the advance notice D from the image element data stored in the CGROM 142. An image element is specified (step S693). For example, the CPU 131 selects the setting table prepared in advance in accordance with whether the value of the effect mode flag is “0” or “1”, thereby changing the effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Correspondingly, the image element data indicating the effect image used in each of the notice patterns A to D is set so as to be specified. Subsequently, the CPU 131 specifies the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142 by referring to the setting table selected in step S693, for example (step S694). Further, the data amount of the image element data read from the CGROM 142 is also specified (step S695). Then, based on the read address specified in steps S694 and S695 and the data amount of the image element data, a display control command serving as a notice transfer command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 provided in the display control unit 121 (step 696). ).

  After executing the process of step S696, for example, based on the value of the effect mode flag, the display control data read from the notice pattern or the effect control pattern determined in step S333 of FIG. The alpha value distribution setting data corresponding to the notice pattern in the notice effect executed during the period is read (step S697). For example, when the value of the effect mode flag is “0” and the notice effect by the notice pattern of the notice A is executed, the CPU 131 corresponds to each pixel constituting the character image CH1, for example, FIG. The alpha value distribution setting data for uniformly distributing the alpha values from the minimum value “0.01” to the maximum value “0.99” as shown in FIG. At this time, alpha value distribution setting data for setting the alpha value to “0” is read corresponding to each pixel constituting the character images CH2 to CH4 used in the notice patterns of notice B to notice D. Then, based on the alpha value distribution setting data read in step S697, an alpha value distribution setting command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 (step S698). At this time, an alpha value distribution setting command indicating the setting of the alpha value is created only for the pixels for which the alpha value is set to a value other than “0”, and for the pixels for which the alpha value is set to “0”, Notification by command may not be performed. Subsequent to the process of step S698, the number of processes N used to change the display of the effect image in the notice effect display with the passage of time is set to “0” and initialized (step S699).

  If it is not the notice start timing in step S692 (step S692; No), after executing the process of step S699, a predetermined notice display command process is executed (step S700). When it is not the notice display period in step S691 (step S691; No), after executing the notice display instruction process in step S700, predetermined various update target instruction processes are executed (step S701).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice display command process executed in step S700 of FIG. In this notice display command processing, the CPU 131 first becomes the notice display update timing for updating the display of the effect image that becomes the notice effect display from the display control data read from the effect control pattern, the effect control timer value, or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S711). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the notice display update timing (step S711; No), the notice display instruction process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the advance display update timing in step S711 (step S711; Yes), for example, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the advance display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is on. (Step S712). The notice display flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S714 to be described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S728.

  When the notice display flag is off in step S712 (step S712; No), it is determined whether or not the operation switch signal, which is a detection signal transmitted from the operation switch 40, is on. Thus, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 40 has been operated (step S713). If the operation switch 40 is operated in step S713 (step S713; Yes), the notice display flag is set to the on state (step S714). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the processing number N is equal to or less than a reference value (for example, “450”) that is predetermined as a step display upper limit value (step S715). Here, the stage display upper limit value is a notice effect display when the effect images such as the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background image displayed in the notice effect display appear in stages in response to the operation of the operation switch 40. As a reference value corresponding to the latest operation timing at which the effect image can be displayed completely at the end timing, any predetermined value may be used.

  If the processing number N is equal to or smaller than the stage display upper limit value in step S715 (step S715; Yes), for example, the stage display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is set to the on state (step S716). ). At this time, in response to the operation of the operation switch 40, the value of the number of processes N is substituted for the process determination value K used for displaying the effect image in the notice effect display step by step with time. (Step S717).

  When the notice display flag is turned on in step S712 (step S712; Yes), or when the processing number N is larger than the step display upper limit value in step S715 (step S715; No), or the process of step S717 Is executed, it is determined whether or not the stage display flag is ON (step S718). At this time, if the stage display flag is on (step S718; Yes), an alpha reference value corresponding to the processing number N is set (step S719). For example, in step S719, the CPU 131 sets an alpha reference value as shown in FIG. Here, the CPU 131 may determine an alpha reference value corresponding to the processing number N from an alpha reference value determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132. The alpha reference value determination table only needs to be configured from setting data for associating the processing number N with the alpha reference value. Alternatively, when the processing number N is K ≦ N ≦ K + 49, the CPU 131 executes an operation of (alpha reference value) = 1−0.02 × (N−K), so that the alpha reference corresponding to the processing number N is performed. While the value is determined by calculation, when the processing number N is N = K + 50, the alpha reference value may be determined to be “0.01”. In this way, the alpha reference value is updated so that an effect image corresponding to the notice pattern is displayed in stages as time passes in response to the operation of the operation switch 40.

  After executing the process of step S719, it is determined whether or not the number of processes N is equal to the value obtained by adding “50” to the process determination value K (step S720), and if it is equal (step S720; Yes), based on the determination that the stepwise display of the effect image in the notice effect display is to be ended, the step display flag is cleared and turned off (step S721). If the stage display flag is OFF in step S718 (step S718; No), the alpha reference value is set to “0.01” (step S722).

  If the number of processes N is different from the value obtained by adding “50” to the process determination value K in step S720 (step S720; No), or after executing any of the processes of steps S721 and S722, alpha The comparison function for executing the test is set to “Established if it is equal to or greater than the reference value” (step S723). Then, a write address in the frame buffer memory 156 is set corresponding to the processing number N (step S724). For example, in step S724, the CPU 131 specifies the address of the frame buffer memory 156 as shown in FIG. With this head address as a reference, for example, the position of the display target pixel in which the alpha test execution result is “established” among the pixels constituting the effect image in the notice effect display (as a specific example, in the effect image By specifying the coordinates of the display target pixels, etc., it is possible to specify the write address when the display color data corresponding to each display target pixel is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 156. In step S724, only the start address of the write destination as shown in FIG. 68 is specified as the write address in the frame buffer memory 156, and the write address of each display target pixel is based on the test execution command on the VDP 141 side. It can be specified after running the alpha test.

  Thereafter, a test execution command is created based on the alpha reference value set in step S719 or step S722, the comparison function set in step S723, and the write address in the frame buffer memory 156 set in step S724. And transmitted to the VDP 141 provided in the display control unit 121 (step S725).

  When there is no operation of the operation switch 40 in step S713 (step S713; No), or after executing the process of step S725, for example, a notice end determination value (for example, “512” or the like) in which the number of processes N is determined in advance. It is determined whether or not it is the end time of the notice by determining whether or not it is (step S726). If it is the end timing of the notice (step S726; Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice display flag is on (step S727). At this time, if the notice display flag is off (step S727; No), the notice effect drawing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the notice display flag is on (step S727; Yes), the notice display flag is cleared and turned off (step S728), and the notice effect rendering process ends. At this time, for example, a display control command for instructing redrawing of the background image may be transmitted to the VDP 141 provided in the display control unit 121, for example, so that the effect image in the notice effect display is deleted. If it is not the end timing of the notice in step S726 (step S726; No), the process number N is incremented by 1 (step S729), and the notice display command process is terminated.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various update target command processes executed in step S701 of FIG. In the various update target command processing, the CPU 131 first specifies an image element whose display is to be updated, for example, from display control data read from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation control timer value (step S741). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the image element specified in step S741 is an image element for which image element data is to be transferred in advance to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 (step S742). ).

  If it is determined in step S742 that the image element is the target of advance transfer (step S742; Yes), for example, the fixed address of the image element temporary storage memory 155 from the display control data read from the effect control pattern. The reading address of the image element data in the area 155A is specified (step S743). Further, for example, the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the display position (display coordinates) of the image element is specified from the display control data read from the effect control pattern (step S744). Further, the data amount of the image element data indicating the image element to be updated is specified (step S745). Thereafter, based on the read address in the fixed address area 155A specified in steps S743 to S745, the write address in the frame buffer memory 156, and the data amount of the image element data, a fixed address designation display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 ( Step S746).

  If it is determined in step S742 that the image element is not an object to be transferred in advance (step S742; No), for example, the display address of the image element data in the CGROM 142 is read from the display control data read from the effect control pattern. It identifies (step S747). Further, for example, the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the display position (display coordinates) of the image element is specified from the display control data read from the effect control pattern (step S748). Further, the data amount of the image data indicating the image element to be updated is specified (step S749). Thereafter, an automatic transfer display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 based on the read address in the CGROM 142, the write address in the frame buffer memory 156, and the data amount of the image element data specified in steps S747 to S749 (step S750).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the command for all image elements to be updated has been completed (step S751). If the command has not been completed (step S751; No), the process returns to step S741. On the other hand, if the command for all the image elements to be updated is completed (step S751; Yes), the various update target command processing is terminated.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit effect process executed in step S194 of FIG. In this jackpot effect process, the CPU 131 first determines whether or not a jackpot round number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S371). At this time, if a jackpot round number notification command is received (step S371; Yes), for example, display control commands, voice control commands, and lamp control commands are generated based on various control data read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the jackpot round number. Settings for controlling the rendering operation are made in correspondence with the number of big hit rounds such as sending (step S372). If no big hit round number notification command is received in step S371 (step S371; No), the process of step S372 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S373). If a jackpot end command is received (step S373; Yes), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S374), and then the jackpot effect process is performed. Exit. If no jackpot end command is received in step S373 (step S373; No), a probability variation re-lottery effect control process is executed (step S375), and an advantageous opening re-lottery effect control process is executed (step S376). Then, the big hit effect process ends.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the probability-change re-lottery effect control process executed in step S375 of FIG. When the probability variation re-lottery effect control process shown in FIG. 71 is started, the CPU 131 first specifies presence / absence of the probability variation re-lottery effect from, for example, stored data in the variable display pattern storage unit provided in the RAM 133, and the probability variation re-lottery effect is determined. It is determined whether or not there is (step S801). At this time, if it is determined that there is no probability variation re-lottery effect (step S801; No), the probability variation re-lottery effect control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S801 that there is a probability variation re-lottery effect (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a probability variation re-lottery effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is on. (Step S802). Here, the probability variation re-lottery effect flag is set to the on state in the process of step S806, which will be described later, and is cleared to the off state in the process of step S809. If the probability variation re-lottery effect in-progress flag is off in step S802 (step S802; No), it is determined whether or not an effect start timing in a predetermined probability variation re-draw effect is reached (step S803). For example, in response to the fact that the jackpot round number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 indicates the first round (for example, the first round) in the jackpot gaming state, it is the effect start timing in the probability variation redrawing effect It is sufficient that the determination is made.

  If it is determined in step S803 that it is not the production start timing in the probability variation re-lottery effect (step S803; No), the probability variation re-lottery effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S803 that it is the production start timing in the probability variation re-lottery effect (step S803; Yes), for example, a plurality of types of presentation modes in the probability variation re-lottery effect are prepared in advance. Either one is determined (step S804). As an example, in step S804, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for effect mode determination that is updated by the random number circuit 134 and the like, and refers to the probability variation re-lottery effect mode determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. Thus, the aspect of the effect operation in the probability variation re-drawing effect is determined.

  In step S804, for example, it is determined from the stored data in the display result storage unit whether the type of the variable display result is a normal big hit, a first probability variation big hit, or a second probability variation big hit. Then, when the type of the variable display result is a normal jackpot, the decorative design that is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as the execution result of the probability variation re-drawing effect is determined from the normal design. For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated by the random number circuit 134, etc., and refers to a normal big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132, etc. Is selected as a decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as a re-lottery result in the probability-change re-lottery effect. On the other hand, when the type of the variable display result is the first probability variation big hit, the decoration symbol to be derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as the execution result of the probability variation re-lottering effect is determined from the first probability variation symbols. . For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated by the random number circuit 134 or the like, and refers to a first probability variable big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. One of the first probability variation symbols is determined as a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a re-lottery result in the probability variation re-lottery effect. Further, when the type of the variable display result is the second probability variation big hit, for example, the presence / absence of the advantageous release re-lottery effect is specified from the stored data in the display result storage unit, and whether or not there is the advantageous release re-lottery effect is determined. judge. At this time, if there is an advantageous opening re-lottery effect, as in the case where the type of variable display result is the first probability variation big hit, the image display device 5 is executed as the execution result of the probability variation re-lottery effect from the first probability variation symbol. The decorative design to be derived and displayed is determined. On the other hand, if there is no advantageous opening re-lottery effect, a decoration symbol to be derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as the execution result of the probability variable re-lottery effect is determined from the second probability variable symbols. For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated by the random number circuit 134, etc., and refers to the second probability variable big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132, etc. One of the second probability variation symbols is determined as a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a re-lottery result in the probability variation re-lottery effect.

  After the process of step S804 is executed, settings for controlling various effect operations are performed in accordance with the effect mode determined in step S804 (step S805). For example, in the process of step S805, the effect control timer setting value shown in the head area of the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect operation mode determined in step S804 is set as the timer initial value in the effect control timer. Moreover, a display control command, a voice control command, a lamp control command, and the like may be sent based on various control data read from the effect control pattern. Thereafter, the probability variation re-lottery effect in-progress flag is set to the on state (step S806), and the probability variation re-lottery effect control process is terminated.

  Further, when the probability variation re-lottery effect flag is on in step S802 (step S802; Yes), the effect control timer value is updated by subtracting, for example, 1 (step S807). It is determined whether or not the effect control timer value updated in this way matches an effect end reference value (for example, “0”) (step S808). After the lottery effect flag is cleared and turned off (step S809), the probability variation re-lottery effect control process is terminated.

  If the effect control timer value does not match the effect end reference value in step S808 (step S808; No), settings for controlling various effect operations during the execution of the probability variation re-lottery effect are performed (step S810). For example, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the effect control timer value matches any of the effect control timer determination values set in the effect control pattern. At this time, when the production control timer determination value matches, various control data associated with the matched production control timer determination value are read. Based on the control data read out in this way, the CPU 131 may send a display control command, a voice control command, a lamp control command, and the like. Thereby, various presentation operations such as a display operation in the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the advantageous re-drawing lottery effect control process executed in step S376 of FIG. When the advantageous opening re-lottery effect control process shown in FIG. 72 is started, the CPU 131 first specifies the presence / absence of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect from the storage data of the display result storage unit provided in the RAM 133, for example, and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect. It is determined whether there is an effect (step S821). At this time, if it is determined that there is no advantageous reopening lottery effect (step S821; No), the advantageous reopening lottery effect control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S821 that there is an advantageous release re-lottery effect (step S821; Yes), whether or not the advantageous release re-lottery effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 133 is on. Is determined (step S822). Here, the advantageous release re-lottery effect in-progress flag is set to the on state in the process of step S826 described later, and is cleared to the off state in the process of step S829. If the advantageous opening re-lottery effect flag is off in step S822 (step S822; No), it is determined whether or not the production start timing for the predetermined advantageous re-opening lottery effect has come (step S823). For example, in response to the fact that the jackpot round number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 indicates the final round (for example, the 15th round) in the jackpot gaming state, the start timing of the effect in the advantageous open re-lottery effect is reached. It is only necessary to make a determination to that effect.

  If it is determined in step S823 that it is not the effect start timing in the advantageous opening re-lottery effect (step S823; No), the advantageous opening re-lottery effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S823 that it is the production start timing in the advantageous open re-lottery effect (step S823; Yes), for example, a plurality of effect modes prepared in advance in the advantageous open re-lottery effect are prepared. The type is determined (step S824). As an example, in step S824, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for effect mode determination updated by the random number circuit 134 and the like, and refers to the advantageous open re-lottery effect mode determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. By doing so, the aspect of the effect operation in the advantageous open re-lottery effect is determined.

  In step S824, for example, it is determined from the stored data in the display result storage unit whether the type of the variable display result is the normal big hit, the first probability variation big hit, or the second probability variation big hit. Then, when the type of the variable display result is a normal big hit, the decorative symbol that is derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as the execution result of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is determined from the normal symbols. For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated by the random number circuit 134, etc., and refers to a normal big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132, etc. Is selected as a decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as a re-lottery result in the advantageous open re-lottery effect. On the other hand, when the type of the variable display result is the first probability variation big hit, the decoration symbol to be derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as the execution result of the advantageous opening re-lottering effect is determined from the first probability variation symbols. To do. For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated by the random number circuit 134, etc., and refers to the first probability variable big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132 or the like. One of the first probability variation symbols is determined as a decorative symbol derived and displayed as a re-lottery result in the advantageous open re-lottery effect. Further, when the type of the variable display result is any one of the second probability variation jackpots, a decoration symbol to be derived and displayed on the image display device 5 as the execution result of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is determined from the second probability variation symbols. To do. For example, the CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the big hit symbol updated by the random number circuit 134, etc., and refers to the second probability variable big hit symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 132, etc. One of the second probability variation symbols is determined as a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a re-lottery result in the advantageous open re-lottery effect.

  After performing the process of step S824, settings for controlling various effect operations are performed according to the effect mode determined in step S824 (step S825). For example, in the process of step S825, the effect control timer setting value shown in the head region of the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect operation mode determined in step S824 is set as the timer initial value in the effect control timer. Moreover, a display control command, a voice control command, a lamp control command, and the like may be sent based on various control data read from the effect control pattern. Thereafter, after the advantageous release re-lottery effect in-progress flag is set to the on state (step S826), the advantageous release re-lottery effect control process is terminated.

  If the advantageous open re-lottery effect flag is on (step S822; Yes), the effect control timer value is updated, for example, by subtracting 1 (step S827). It is determined whether or not the production control timer value updated in this way matches the production end reference value (for example, “0”) (step S828). If the production control timer value matches the production end reference value (step S828; Yes), the advantage is released. After clearing the re-lottery effect flag (step S829), the advantageous opening re-lottery effect control process is terminated.

  If the effect control timer value does not match the effect end reference value in step S828, settings for controlling various effect operations during execution of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect are performed (step S830). For example, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the effect control timer value matches any of the effect control timer determination values set in the effect control pattern. At this time, when the production control timer determination value matches, various control data associated with the matched production control timer determination value are read. Based on the control data read out in this way, the CPU 131 may send a display control command, a voice control command, a lamp control command, and the like. Thereby, various presentation operations such as a display operation in the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of transfer control processing executed by the transfer control circuit 152 included in the VDP 141. In this transfer control process, the transfer control circuit 152 first determines whether there is a command serving as a display control command received from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151 (step S401). If there is no command received from the effect control microcomputer 120 (step S401; No), the process of step S401 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  If there is a reception command in step S401 (step S401; Yes), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a storage area setting command (step S402). If it is a storage area setting command (step S402; Yes), a predetermined storage area setting process is executed (step S403). If it is not a storage area setting command (step S402; No), the received command is pre-transferred. It is determined whether it is a command (step S404).

  If the received command is a pre-transfer command in step S404 (step S404; Yes), a predetermined pre-transfer process is executed (step S405), but if it is not a pre-transfer command (step S404; No), the received command is It is determined whether the command is an automatic transfer display command (step S406). If the received command is an automatic transfer display command in step S406 (step S406; Yes), a predetermined automatic transfer control process is executed (step S407), but if it is not an automatic transfer display command (step S406; No), It is determined whether or not the received command is a notice transfer command (step S408). If the received command is a notice transfer command in step S408 (step S408; Yes), a predetermined notice transfer control process is executed (step S409). When the received command is not a notice transfer command in step S408 (step S408; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S403, S405, S407, and S409, the process returns to step S401.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage area setting process executed in step S403 of FIG. In this storage area setting process, the transfer control circuit 152 first clears the image element temporary storage memory 155 and initializes the stored contents (step S421). Subsequently, the address STADD serving as the start address of the automatic transfer area 155B is specified from the data included in the storage area setting command (step S422). Then, the address STADD specified at this time is set and stored in the internal register of the VDP 141 (step S423). Further, the transfer control circuit 152 specifies the address ENADD that is the final address of the automatic transfer area 155B from the data included in the storage area setting command (step S424). Then, the address ENADD specified at this time is set and stored in the internal register of the VDP 141 (step S425), and the storage area setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance transfer process executed in step S405 of FIG. In this advance transfer process, the transfer control circuit 152 first specifies the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142 from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S441). Subsequently, the writing address of the image element data in the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S442). Further, the data amount of the image element data to be transferred is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S443). Then, based on the read address, write address, and data amount of the image element data specified in steps S441 to S443, data transfer start setting is performed to transfer the image element data read from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A. (Step S444). For example, in step S444, the transfer control circuit 152 sets the read address of the CGROM 142, the write address of the image element temporary storage memory 155, and the data amount of the image element data as the transfer data amount in a predetermined DMA device. Instructs start of transfer of image element data by transfer.

  Thereafter, the transfer control circuit 152 determines whether or not the transfer of the image element data has been completed (step S445), and if not completed (step S445; No), the process of step S445 is repeated and waits. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S445 that the transfer of the image element data has been completed based on, for example, a predetermined transfer completion signal output from the DMA device (step S445; Yes), the index table 251 provided in the VDP 141 is provided. After the completion of the transfer of the image element data is registered (step S446), the advance transfer process is terminated. In the processing of step S446, the transfer control circuit 152 writes data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the image element data transferred to the fixed address area 155A to the index table 251 and corresponds. Set “Reading completion flag” to “On”.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the automatic transfer control process executed in step S407 of FIG. In this automatic transfer control process, the transfer control circuit 152 first specifies the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142 from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S461). Subsequently, the writing address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is specified (step S462). For example, in the process of step S462, the transfer control circuit 152 refers to the index table 251 and stores valid image element data with the “transfer completion flag” set to “on” in the automatic transfer area 155B. Identify a free area other than the current area. Of the vacant areas thus identified, an area for storing the image element data to be transferred this time is determined, and the head address thereof may be specified as the write address.

  Subsequently, the transfer control circuit 152 specifies the amount of image element data to be transferred from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S463). Then, based on the read address, write address, and data amount of the image element data specified in steps S461 to S463, data transfer start setting is performed to transfer the image element data read from the CGROM 142 to the automatic transfer area 155B. (Step S464). For example, in step S464, the transfer control circuit 152 sets the data amount of the image element data as the read address of the CGROM 142, the write address of the image element temporary storage memory 155, and the amount of transfer data in a predetermined DMA device. Instructs start of transfer of image element data by transfer.

  Thereafter, the transfer control circuit 152 determines whether or not the transfer of the image element data has been completed (step S465), and if not completed (step S465; No), the process of step S465 is repeated and waits. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S465 that the transfer of the image element data has been completed based on, for example, a predetermined transfer completion signal output from the DMA device (step S465; Yes), the index table 251 provided in the VDP 141 is provided. After the completion of the transfer of the image element data is registered in (Step S466), the automatic transfer control process is terminated. In the process of step S466, the transfer control circuit 152 writes data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the image element data transferred to the automatic transfer area 155B to the index table 251 to cope with it. Set “Reading completion flag” to “On”. When image element data is transferred by this automatic transfer control processing, the image circuit data transfer destination address (write address) in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is notified to the drawing circuit 154. Thus, the image element data may be read by the drawing circuit 154.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice transfer control process executed in step S409 of FIG. In this notice transfer control process, the transfer control circuit 152 first specifies the read address of the image element data in the CGROM 142 from the data included in the notice transfer command (step S481). Subsequently, the writing address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is specified from the data included in the notice transfer command (step S482). Further, the amount of image element data to be transferred is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S483). Then, based on the read address, the write address, and the data amount of the image element data specified in steps S481 to S483, the data transfer start setting is performed to transfer the image element data read from the CGROM 142 to the automatic transfer area 155B. (Step S484). For example, in step S484, the transfer control circuit 152 sets the read address of the CGROM 142, the write address of the image element temporary storage memory 155, and the data amount of the image element data as the transfer data amount in a predetermined DMA device. Instructs start of transfer of image element data by transfer.

  Thereafter, the transfer control circuit 152 determines whether or not the transfer of the image element data has been completed (step S485), and if not completed (step S485; No), the process of step S485 is repeated and waits. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S485 that the transfer of the image element data is completed based on, for example, a predetermined transfer completion signal output from the DMA device (step S485; Yes), the index table 251 provided in the VDP 141 is provided. After the completion of the transfer of the image element data is registered (step S486), the notice transfer control process is terminated. In the process of step S486, the transfer control circuit 152 writes data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the image element data transferred to the automatic transfer area 155B to the index table 251 and corresponds. Set “Reading completion flag” to “On”.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a drawing process executed by the drawing circuit 154 included in the VDP 141. In this drawing process, the drawing circuit 154 first determines whether or not there is a command serving as a display control command received from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151 (step S501). If there is no reception command from the production control microcomputer 120 (step S501; No), the process of step S501 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a fixed address designation display command (step S502). If it is a fixed address designation display command (step S502; Yes), a predetermined fixed address designation display process is executed (step S503), but if it is not a fixed address designation display command (step S502; No), a received command Is an automatic transfer display command (step S504).

  If the received command is an automatic transfer display command in step S504 (step S504; Yes), a predetermined automatic transfer display process is executed (step S505), but if it is not an automatic transfer display command (step S504; No), It is determined whether or not the received command is an alpha value distribution setting command (step S506). If the received command is an alpha value distribution setting command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), a predetermined alpha test drawing process is executed (step S507), but not an alpha value distribution setting command (step S506; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a test execution command (step S508).

  If the received command is a test execution command in step S508 (step S508; Yes), a predetermined alpha test process is executed (step S509). If the received command is not a test execution command in step S508 (step S508; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S503, S505, S507, and S509, the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed address designation display process executed in step S503 of FIG. In this fixed address designation display process, the drawing circuit 154 first specifies the read address of the image element data in the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 from the data included in the fixed address designation display command (step S521). ). Subsequently, the index table 251 is referred to based on the read address specified in step S521, and it is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image element data to be read is “ON”. (Step S522).

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S522 (step S522; Yes), the image element data write address in the frame buffer memory 156 is identified from the data included in the fixed address designation display command. (Step S523). Then, the drawing circuit 154 reads the image element data from the read address specified in step S521, and writes it to the write address specified in step S523 (step S524). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not drawing by writing image element data to the frame buffer memory 156 is completed (step S525). If not completed (step S525; No), the read address and the write address are updated. (Step S526), the process returns to step S524. On the other hand, if the drawing is completed in step S525 (step S525; Yes), the fixed address designation display process is terminated.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “OFF” in step S522 (step S522; No), it is determined whether a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S527). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (step S527; No), the process returns to step S522 and waits. On the other hand, when the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S527 (step S527; Yes), for example, predetermined error information is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S528), the fixed address designation display process is terminated. In the effect control microcomputer 120 that has received the error information transmitted by the drawing circuit 154 executing the process of step S528, for example, the CPU 131 sends a predetermined control command to the sound control unit 122 or the lamp control unit 123. Thus, the occurrence of an error may be notified by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting or blinking a predetermined lamp or LED, or the like. At this time, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the occurrence of an error are notified by lighting or blinking predetermined lamps or LEDs, etc., so that the display operation in the image display device 5 is abnormal and cannot be displayed correctly. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the automatic transfer display process executed in step S505 of FIG. In this automatic transfer display process, the drawing circuit 154 first specifies the read address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 based on, for example, a notification from the transfer control circuit 152 (step). S541). Subsequently, the index table 251 is referred based on the read address specified in step S541, and it is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image element data to be read is “ON”. (Step S542).

  When the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S542 (step S542; Yes), the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156 is specified from the data included in the automatic transfer display command. (Step S543). Then, the drawing circuit 154 reads the image element data from the read address specified in step S541 and writes it to the write address specified in step S543 (step S544). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not drawing by writing image element data to the frame buffer memory 156 is completed (step S545). If not completed (step S545; No), the read address and the write address are updated. After that (step S546), the process returns to step S544. On the other hand, if the drawing is completed in step S545 (step S545; Yes), the “transfer completion flag” registered in the index table 251 in association with the image element data used for drawing is cleared to “off”. After (step S547), the automatic transfer display process is terminated.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “OFF” in step S542 (step S542; No), it is determined whether a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S548). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (step S548; No), the process returns to step S542 and waits. On the other hand, if the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S548 (step S548; Yes), for example, predetermined error information is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S549), the automatic transfer display process is terminated. When the rendering control microcomputer 120 receives the error information transmitted by the drawing circuit 154 executing the process of step S549, the CPU 131, for example, receives the error information transmitted by the process of step S528. Notification of the occurrence of an error by sending a predetermined control command to the sound control unit 122 or the lamp control unit 123, or by turning on or blinking a predetermined lamp or LED, etc. You just have to do it.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the alpha value setting process executed in step S507 of FIG. In this alpha value setting process, the drawing circuit 154 first refers to the index table 251, and the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image element data used for displaying the effect image to be the notice effect display is “ It is determined whether or not “ON” (step S561). For example, in step S561, the drawing circuit 154 temporarily stores image element data corresponding to each of the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background image used in the respective notice patterns A to D as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” for the image element data registered in the index table 251 with the head address in each area as the “start address”. Here, the drawing circuit 154 displays the image element data set used for displaying the character images CH1 to CH4 in the first effect mode # 1 and the second effect mode # 2 in FIG. 27B. All of the “transfer completion flags” corresponding to any one of the image element data sets among the image element data sets used for displaying the background image as shown in FIG. If so, it is determined in step S561 that the “transfer completion flag” is on. If no image element data is registered in the index table 251, it may be determined that the “transfer completion flag” is “off”.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S561 (step S561; Yes), the alpha value of each pixel specified by the alpha value distribution setting command is set (step S562). At this time, the drawing circuit 154 reads the alpha value of each pixel notified by the alpha value distribution setting command. Then, the image elements corresponding to the character images CH1 to CH4 and the background image used in the respective notice patterns of notice A to notice D in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 are read data indicating the alpha value. What is necessary is just to set by writing in the address corresponding to each pixel in each area | region for temporarily storing data. For pixels for which an alpha value is not designated by the alpha value distribution setting command, data indicating “0” is set by writing data corresponding to the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 (step S563). .

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “off” in step S561 (step S561; No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S564). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (step S564; No), the process returns to step S561 and waits. On the other hand, when the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S564 (step S564; Yes), for example, predetermined error information is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 151. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S565), the alpha value setting process is terminated. In the effect control microcomputer 120 that has received the error information transmitted by the drawing circuit 154 executing the process of step S565, for example, the CPU 131 sends a predetermined control command to the sound control unit 122 or the lamp control unit 123. Thus, the occurrence of an error may be notified by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting or blinking a predetermined lamp or LED, or the like. At this time, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the occurrence of an error are notified by lighting or blinking predetermined lamps or LEDs, etc., so that the display operation in the image display device 5 is abnormal and cannot be displayed correctly. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of alpha test processing executed in step S509 of FIG. In this alpha test process, the drawing circuit 154 identifies an alpha reference value from the data included in the test execution command, and executes a comparison operation between the identified alpha reference value and the alpha value of each pixel (step S571). At this time, a pixel that satisfies the display condition “satisfied” by the comparison function specified from the data included in the test execution command is determined as a display target pixel to be displayed on the image display device 5 (step S572). . Then, the display target pixel determined in step S572 is read from the automatic transfer area 155B in the image element temporary storage memory 155 and copied to the write address of the frame buffer memory 156 notified by the data included in the test execution command. After the display data is updated by writing (step S573), the alpha test process is terminated.

  Image elements read out from the fixed address area 155A or automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 by executing the fixed address designation display process, automatic transfer display process, or alpha test process as described above. Data is written in the frame buffer memory 156 and drawing is performed to create display data. For example, when drawing for one screen is completed in the image display device 5, the display circuit 157 is stored in the frame buffer memory 156 in response to the display update timing in the image display device 5 being reached. The display data is read out, converted into gradation data, and output to the image display device 5. As a result, an image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  Next, the operation in the payout control board 15 will be described. In the payout control board 15, when power supply from the power supply board 10 is started, the payout control microcomputer 150 is activated, and the payout control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83 is executed by the CPU 273. When the payout control main process shown in FIG. 83 is started, first, interruption is prohibited (step S901), and interruption mode is set (step S902). Subsequently, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of a stack pointer designation address, are performed (step S903). Also, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S904). For example, when the payout control microcomputer 150 has a built-in CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), the processing in step S904 is executed, whereby a built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit). CTC or PIO setting (initialization) or the like may be performed.

  After executing the processing in step S904, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state by checking the state of a predetermined bit in the input port included in the input / output port 278, for example (step S905). ). For example, in the process of step S905, it is confirmed that the power-off signal is not output and is in an off state (high level).

  If the power-off signal is in the on state in step S905 (step S905; No), after waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) to elapse (step S906), the process returns to step S905 to turn off the power. It is determined again whether or not the signal is off. Thereby, it is possible to confirm that the power supply voltage is stable in the payout control microcomputer 150. If the power-off signal is off in step S905 (step S905; Yes), the RAM 275 is set to be accessible (step S907).

  After executing the processing of step S907, it is determined whether or not the clear signal is in an on state by checking the state of a predetermined bit in the input port included in the input / output port 278, for example (step S908). . At this time, the CPU 273 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed once that the state of the clear signal is OFF, the state of the clear signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed. At this time, if the clear signal is off, it is determined that the clear signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the clear signal is on at this time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the clear signal may be one time or a plurality of times. In addition, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  When it is determined in step S908 that the clear signal is in the OFF state (step S908; No), data check of the RAM 275 is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (step S909). In the process of step S909, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 275, and the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum stored in the payout checksum buffer. Here, the payout checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. If the comparison results do not match, the data in the specific area of the RAM 275 is different from the data at the time of stopping the power supply, and therefore it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result in step S909 is normal (step S909; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined payout backup flag is on (step S910). The state of the payout backup flag is set in a predetermined area such as the RAM 275 when the power supply is stopped. Then, the place where the payout backup flag is set is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the payout backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped. Whether the payout backup flag is turned on as in step S910 is determined prior to the check result determination as in step S909, and the data check of the RAM 235 is performed when the payout backup flag is on. You may make it determine whether a result is normal.

  If the payout backup flag is on in step S910 (step S910; Yes), the payout backup flag is cleared and turned off (step S911), and then the internal state of the payout control microcomputer 150 is supplied with power. The setting at the time of restoration for returning to the state when stopped is performed (step S912). For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, if the value of a predetermined prize ball unpaid counter is stored in the backup area of the RAM 275, the backup area of the RAM 275 is stored in the process of step S912. The data may be read out and set in the prize ball unpaid counter.

  Further, when the clear signal is on in step S908 (step S908; Yes), when the check result is not normal in step S909 (step S909; No), or the payout backup flag is off in step S910. If there is (step S910; No), the RAM 275 is initialized (step S913). Subsequently, setting at the time of initialization for setting the internal state of the payout control microcomputer 150 to the initial state is performed (step S914). For example, in the process of step S914, initial values may be set in various flags provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 275, various timers, various counters, or the like.

  After executing the processing of step S912 or step S914, for example, by setting the register of the timer circuit 276, etc., the payout control microcomputer 150 of the payout control microcomputer 150 generates a timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). Internal setting is performed (step S915).

  Thereafter, the CPU 273 executes serial communication initial setting processing for initial setting of serial communication operation by the serial communication circuit 277 (step S916). The serial communication initial setting process may be the same as the process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 executed by the CPU 114 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side. In addition, the CPU 273 executes an interrupt initial setting process for performing an initial setting related to the interrupt process executed based on the interrupt request (step S917). This interrupt initial setting process may be the same process as the process of step S18 shown in FIG. 41 executed by the CPU 114 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side. Then, the CPU 273 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S918) and waits for various interrupts to occur. At this time, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal has been turned on (whether or not it has been output) (step S919). If it is off (step S919; No), the generation of various interrupts is awaited. When the power-off signal is turned on (step S919; Yes), the payout-side power cut-off process is executed (step S920), and then a predetermined loop process is executed for the payout control by stopping the power supply. Wait until the microcomputer 150 stops operating.

  In the process of step S919, the state of the power-off signal may be confirmed only once via the input port, but the state of the power-off signal may be confirmed a plurality of times. For example, once it is confirmed that the power-off signal is in the off state, the power-off signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. At this time, if the power-off signal is off, it is determined that the power-off signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the power-off signal is on at this time, the state of the power-off signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. It should be noted that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the power-off signal may be one or multiple times. In addition, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match. Thus, when confirming the state of the power-off signal multiple times, for example, when the confirmation operation is started or when the first confirmation result and the second confirmation result are compared and there is a mismatch, etc. Retriggering is performed to clear the WDT (watchdog timer) built in the control microcomputer 150. When the retrigger does not occur within a predetermined time for some reason (for example, program runaway), a user reset is generated based on a timeout signal output from the WDT, and the reset / interrupt controller 272, CPU 273, timer circuit After initializing each circuit such as H.276 and serial communication circuit 277, execution of the user program may be started from an address indicated by a predetermined vector table to perform automatic recovery.

  In the payout-side power cut-off process in step S920, for example, after the CPU 273 sets the interrupt prohibition, the clear motor is set to a predetermined bit of the output port included in the input / output port 278 to stop the operation of the payout motor 50. Make settings for At this time, clear data may be set for an output port to be cleared in addition to a predetermined bit of the output port. Subsequently, for example, checksum is calculated by using the storage data in a specific area of the RAM 275 to create check data, and a payout backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 275 is set to an on state. The check data created at this time is stored in a payout checksum buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 275, for example. The payout control microcomputer 150 then prohibits access to the RAM 275, for example, by setting an access prohibition value in a predetermined RAM access register.

  In the payout control microcomputer 150, in response to the interrupt factor generated in the serial communication circuit 277, interrupt processing executed by the CPU 114 included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is performed. A serial communication error interrupt process adapted to the computer 150 may be executed. For example, every time an error interrupt occurs in the serial communication circuit 277 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150, the CPU 273 executes a process in which the process shown in FIG. 43 is adapted to the payout control microcomputer 150. Good. In this process, for example, the transmission operation unit provided in the serial communication circuit 277 included in the payout control microcomputer 150 is set to an unused state, and the reception operation unit provided in the serial communication circuit 277 is set to an unused state. To do. Thereafter, the CPU 273 may perform processing such as setting a predetermined flag such as a serial communication error flag to an on state.

  Further, every time a reception interrupt occurs in the serial communication circuit 277 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150, the CPU 273 executes a predetermined serial reception interrupt process, and in the serial communication circuit 277 provided in the payout control microcomputer 150. Every time a transmission interrupt occurs, the CPU 273 may execute a predetermined serial transmission interrupt process.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 273 each time a timer interrupt occurs in the payout control microcomputer 150. This payout control timer interruption process is a process that becomes a payout control process for controlling the payout motor 50 in accordance with the payout control command transmitted from the main board 11. When the payout control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 84 is started, the CPU 273 first executes a predetermined input / output process (step S931), and checks the state of a predetermined bit at an input port included in the input / output port 278, for example. Or a predetermined control data is set for a predetermined bit at the output port.

  Subsequently, the CPU 273 executes a prepaid card unit process and performs communication with the card unit 70 connected via the interface board 16 (step S932). Further, a payout side reception process for receiving the payout control command transmitted from the main board 11 by serial communication is executed (step S933). Then, a prize ball reception confirmation process is performed for performing settings such as sending a prize ball ACK command when a payout number designation command is received from the main board 11 (step S934). Further, in accordance with a ball lending request from the card unit 70 or a payout number designation command from the main board 11, a payout operation control process for controlling the payout operation of the game ball is executed (step S935).

  Subsequent to the process of step S935, the CPU 273 executes a 7-segment display process in which a display corresponding to the state of various error flags provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 275, for example, is performed with a predetermined error display LED (step S935). S936). Further, a payout side transmission process for transmitting a payout notification command to the main board 11 is executed (step S937). Thereafter, the CPU 273 executes a payout-side error canceling process to enable a predetermined error to be canceled when a detection signal from a predetermined error canceling switch is turned on (step S938). End interrupt processing.

  Next, an example of a specific operation in the present embodiment will be described. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 10 is started, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated on the effect control board 12 and the CPU 131 executes the initialization process ( In step S61 in FIG. 56, a storage area setting command process is executed (step S62). In this storage area setting command processing, a storage area setting command is transmitted from the production control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141 (step S163 in FIG. 57).

  In the VDP 141, for example, in response to receiving the storage area setting command (Step S402 in FIG. 73; Yes), the transfer control circuit 152 executes a storage area setting process (Step S403). In this storage area setting process, the address STADD and the address ENADD notified by the storage area setting command are stored in the internal register of the VDP 141 (steps S423 and S425 in FIG. 74), thereby storing the storage area in the image element temporary storage memory 155. Are set in the fixed address area 155A and the automatic transfer area 155B.

  Thereafter, in the production control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 executes a pre-transfer command process in response to the activation of the production control microcomputer 120 (step S63 in FIG. 56). In the advance transfer instruction process, for example, the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B shown in FIG. 28B corresponding to the value of the effect mode flag are set (step S171 in FIG. 58). Subsequently, based on the read address, the write address, and the data amount of the image element data specified from the table data read according to the processing number and the pre-transfer count value, a pre-transfer command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 (step S174 to S180).

  For example, in the advance transfer setting table 211A prepared corresponding to the first presentation mode # 1, image element data used for displaying decorative symbols indicating numbers “1” to “8” is displayed as an image. Table data indicating a read address, a write address, a data amount, and the like is stored as image element data corresponding to the effect image having a higher execution frequency than the effect image corresponding to the required image element data. More specifically, during the period of the first presentation mode # 1, the frequency with which the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “8” are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is the notice A to The character images CH1 to CH4 are set to be higher than the frequency with which the character images CH1 to CH4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with each notice pattern of the notice D. Therefore, the advance transfer setting table 211A stores table data indicating a read address, a write address, a data amount, and the like corresponding to image element data for displaying decorative symbols indicating numbers “1” to “8”. Keep it. Further, in the advance transfer setting table 211B prepared in correspondence with the second effect mode # 2, the image element data used for displaying the decorative pattern indicating the numbers “1” to “8” is displayed as an image. Table data indicating a read address, a write address, a data amount, and the like is stored as image element data corresponding to the effect image having a higher execution frequency than the effect image corresponding to the required image element data. More specifically, during the period of the second effect mode # 2, the frequency at which the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “8” are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is the notice A to The background image as shown in FIGS. 27B to 27D is set to be higher than the frequency with which the background image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with each notice pattern of the notice D. Therefore, the advance transfer setting table 211B stores table data indicating the read address, write address, data amount, etc. corresponding to the image element data for displaying the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “8”. Keep it.

  When the CPU 131 executes the pre-transfer command process in step S63 of FIG. 56, the pre-transfer setting table 211A is based on clearing the effect mode flag and updating it to “0” in the initialization process in step S61. The transfer of image element data corresponding to the table data is instructed. In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the pre-transfer process in response to receiving the pre-transfer command (Step S404 in FIG. 73; Yes) (Step S405). In this advance transfer process, the image element data is read from the CGROM 142 based on the read address, the write address, the data amount, etc. of the image element data notified by the advance transfer command, and the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is read. (Steps S441 to S445 in FIG. 75).

  Thereafter, the detection signal from the start port switch 22 is turned on in response to the game ball that has been driven into the game area winning the start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6 (FIG. 45). Step S111; Yes), the execution condition for executing the variable display of the special symbol game on the special symbol display device 4 and the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is established. Numeric data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 updated by the random number circuit 113 or the like is extracted based on the establishment of such variable display execution conditions, and is stored as reserved data in the special figure reservation storage unit 161A ( Steps S202 and S203 in FIG. 46).

  Thereafter, in response to the establishment of a start condition for starting the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination is read from the special symbol storage unit 161A ( In step S601 in FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot depending on whether or not the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data (step S606). When it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit when the random number MR1 for jackpot determination matches the determination value data (S606; Yes), the jackpot flag is set to the on state (step S607). Subsequently, a process for determining whether to control the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 between the normal gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state, and the second probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Execute. At this time, depending on the determination result of whether or not the probability changing flag is on, or the determination result of whether or not the advantageous release flag is on when the probability changing flag is on, FIG. Among the normal-time gaming state determination table 192, the first probability variation gaming state determination table 193 illustrated in FIG. 17B, and the second probability variation gaming state determination table 194 illustrated in FIG. One of the tables is referred to (steps S608 to S612). Accordingly, for example, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state, or the second probability variation gaming state. Accordingly, the determination ratios for determining the game state after the end of the big hit game state as the normal game state or the first and second probability variation game states can be made different. In accordance with the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state determined in this way, a probability change confirmation flag and an advantageous release confirmation flag are set (steps S614 to S619).

  Subsequently, in the display result setting process shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S631 in FIG. 49), and when it is off (step S631; No). Whether or not to reach is determined (step S633). Corresponding to this determination result, any of the display result notification # 1, # 2 commands 9001h, 9002h is set to be transmittable to the effect control board 12 (step S634).

  When the big hit flag is on (step S631; Yes), if it is further determined that the probability variation confirmation flag is on (step S638; Yes), the random value MR6 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the advantageous release re-lottery effect is executed by determining whether or not it matches the effect execution determination value data set by the advantageous release re-lottery execution determination table 186 shown (step S645, Step S651 in FIG. For example, when the advantageous release determination flag is on (step S641 in FIG. 49; Yes), when it is determined to execute the advantageous release re-lottery effect (step S651 in FIG. 50; Yes), the second certain change is made. A command 9006h of display result notification # 6 indicating that there is an advantageous opening re-lottery effect as well as a big win is set to be transmittable to the effect control board 12 (step S652).

  In the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 51, when it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S671; Yes), the random value MR5 is the probability variation re-lottery execution determination table 185 shown in FIG. By determining whether or not it matches the performance execution determination value data set by the above, it is determined whether or not to execute the probability variation re-lottery effect (step S674). Also, the variable display pattern corresponding to the random value MR3 is determined with reference to the big hit pattern determination table 188 shown in FIG. 16A (steps S675, S682, S683). Then, the EXT data specified in the variable display pattern table 187 as shown in FIG. 15 corresponding to the presence / absence of the probability variation re-lottery effect determined in step S674 and the variable display pattern determined in step S683. The included variable display start command 80XXh is set to be transmittable to the effect control board 12 (step S684). Thus, the variable display start command 80XXh transmitted to the effect control board 12 indicates whether or not the probability variation re-lottery effect is executed together with the variable display pattern.

  On the side of the production control board 12, the type of the variable display result indicated in the display result notification command 90XXh transmitted from the main board 11 is specified, and it is determined whether or not the type of the specified variable display result is a big hit. (Step S321 in FIG. 62). If the type of the variable display result specified at this time is a big hit (step S321; Yes), the probability variation re-lottery effect is performed from the EXT data included in the variable display start command 80XXh transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325 in FIG. 63). If there is a probability variation re-drawing effect (step S325; Yes), the normal jackpot combination that provides the same normal symbol on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5 Is determined (step S327).

  Further, in the effect control board 12, for example, based on the random number SR1 for notice determination extracted by the CPU 131 from the random number circuit 134 or the like, the notice control board 12 refers to either the notice notice determination table 201 at the time of a loss or the notice decision table 202 at the time of a big hit, to notify Whether to execute or not and to determine the notice pattern when executing (steps S333 to S337 in FIG. 62). An effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display pattern indicated in the variable display start command, the type of variable display result indicated in the display result notification command, the notice pattern, and the like is shown in FIG. 29A. Determination is made from among a plurality of types stored in the table 221 (step S338). Then, by setting an effect control timer initial value corresponding to the effect control pattern, the total variable display time of the decorative symbols is set corresponding to the variable display pattern or the like (step S339).

  Based on the above processing, for example, the image display device 5 starts variable display of decorative symbols. At this time, in the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, based on the display control data read from the effect control pattern by the CPU 131, if the display update timing is in the image display device 5 (step S354 in FIG. 64; Yes), the display update is performed. Command processing is executed (step S355). In this display update command processing, various update target command processing is executed (step S701 in FIG. 65), and the image element to be updated is the image element to be transferred in advance to the fixed address area 155A. (Step S742 in FIG. 69).

  For example, when data indicating the read address, the write address, the data amount, etc. of the image element data corresponding to the image element to be updated is stored as table data in any of the pre-transfer setting tables 211A and 211B, The image element is determined to be an image element for which image element data is to be transferred in advance to the fixed address area 155A (step S742; Yes). More specifically, in the case where the first effect mode # 1 is set, if any of the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “8” is an update target, it is determined to be transferred in advance. Is determined to be an image element. Based on the determination result, the CPU 131 determines, for example, the display address of the image element data in the fixed address area 155A, the write address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156, and the update target based on the display control data read from the effect control pattern. The data amount of the image element data indicating the image element is specified, and a fixed address designation display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 (steps S743 to S746).

  In the VDP 141, for example, in response to receiving the fixed address designation display command (step S502; Yes in FIG. 78), the drawing circuit 154 executes a fixed address designation display process (step S503). In this fixed address designation display process, the image element data read from the fixed address area 155A is stored in the frame buffer memory 156 based on the read address, write address, data amount, etc. of the image element data notified by the fixed address designation display command. It is written and stored (steps S521 to S526 in FIG. 79).

  On the other hand, when the data indicating the read address, the write address, the data amount, etc. of the image element data corresponding to the image element to be updated is not stored in any of the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B, the image element Is determined not to be an image element for which image element data is to be transferred in advance to the fixed address area 155A (step S742 in FIG. 69; No). Based on the determination result, the CPU 131 determines the image element data read address in the CGROM 142, the image element data write address in the frame buffer memory 156, and the image element to be updated based on, for example, display control data read from the effect control pattern. Is specified, and an automatic transfer display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 (steps S747 to S750).

  In the VDP 141, first, for example, in response to the reception of the automatic transfer display command (Step S406 in FIG. 73; Yes), the transfer control circuit 152 executes an automatic transfer control process (Step S407). In this automatic transfer control process, the reading address of the image element data in the CGROM 142 is specified from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S461 in FIG. 76). On the other hand, the write address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is for storing the image element data from the empty area specified by referring to the index table 251, for example. Is automatically specified by the transfer control circuit 152 as the start address of the selected area (step S462). Based on the data amount of the image element data notified by the automatic transfer display command (step S463), the image element data read from the CGROM 142 is written and stored in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 (step S463). S464, S465).

  Subsequently, in the VDP 141, for example, in response to the reception of the automatic transfer display command (step S504 in FIG. 78; Yes), the drawing circuit 154 executes automatic transfer display processing (step S505). In this automatic transfer display processing, for example, based on the read address of image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B notified from the transfer control circuit 152, the read address of image element data notified by the automatic transfer display command, the data amount, etc. The image element data read from the automatic transfer area 155B is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 156 (steps S541 to S546 in FIG. 80).

  Further, in the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, when the CPU 131 determines that it is the notice display period (step S691 in FIG. 65; Yes), by displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. A process for executing the notice effect display is executed. FIG. 85 shows an example of the display operation on the image display device 5 when the notice pattern of the notice A is selected during the period in which the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first effect mode # 1. Yes.

  Here, with respect to the image element data corresponding to the effect image used in the notice effect display, the data indicating the read address, the write address, the data amount, etc. is not stored in any of the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B. . In addition, display control data included in the effect control pattern or the like so that the image element that is the effect image used in the notice effect display is not specified as the image element to be updated in step S741 in FIG. Is defined. In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU 131 identifies image elements corresponding to the character images CH1 to CH4 used in the respective notice patterns of notice A to notice D in step S693 shown in FIG. Then, the CPU 131 specifies the read address and data amount of the image element data corresponding to the specified image element in the CGROM 142, creates a notice transfer command, and transmits it to the VDP 141 (steps S694 to S696). In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the notice transfer control process in response to receiving the notice transfer command (step S408; Yes in FIG. 73) (step S409). In the advance transfer control process, the image element data read from the CGROM 142 is converted into the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 based on the read address and the data amount of the image element data notified by the advance transfer command. In FIG. 77, image element data corresponding to each of the character images CH1 to CH4 used in the respective notice patterns of notice A to notice D is written and temporarily stored in each area for temporarily storing (steps S481 to S485 in FIG. 77). As a result, image data for displaying effect images corresponding to each of the notice patterns A to D is read from the CGROM 142 before the notice effect display is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. . However, at this time point, image element data corresponding to each of the effect images used in each notice pattern is only temporarily stored in the automatic transfer area 155B, and writing to the frame buffer memory 156 is not performed.

  Specifically, for example, based on the setting of the area in the automatic transfer area 155B as shown in FIG. 34, the display color data corresponding to each pixel constituting the character image CH1 is offset from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B. Is temporarily written and stored in the area of + 000000h to + 00FFFFh. The display color data corresponding to each pixel constituting the character image CH2 is temporarily stored by being written in the area of + 010000h to 01FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B. Display color data corresponding to each pixel constituting the character image CH3 is temporarily stored by being written in the area of + 020000h to 02FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B. The display color data corresponding to each pixel constituting the character image CH4 is temporarily stored by being written in the area of + 030000h to 03FFFFh from the start address STADD in the automatic transfer area 155B.

  Subsequently, in the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, the CPU 131 reads the alpha value distribution setting data corresponding to the notice pattern from the ROM 132 (step S697 in FIG. 65), and the alpha value corresponding to the read alpha value distribution setting data. A distribution setting command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 (step S698). In the VDP 141, for example, in response to the drawing circuit 154 receiving the alpha value distribution setting command (step S506 in FIG. 78; Yes), the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 receives the notices A to D. By writing alpha value setting data corresponding to each pixel of character images CH1 to CH4 in each region for temporarily storing image element data corresponding to each of character images CH1 to CH4 used in each notice pattern. Set the alpha value of each pixel. At this time, the alpha value specified by the data included in the alpha value distribution setting command is set for each pixel constituting the effect image used in the notice pattern selected as the notice pattern in the notice effect display. (Step S562 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, each pixel constituting the effect image used in the notice pattern that is not selected as the notice pattern in the notice effect display is not read as a display target pixel when the alpha test is executed. Thus, data indicating that the alpha value is “0” is set (step S563).

  Thereafter, until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected in step S713 shown in FIG. 66, the processing in step S725 is not executed. Therefore, the image element data corresponding to the effect image used in the notice pattern is stored in the frame buffer memory. 156 is not written. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (B), the display of the notice effect image such as the effect character and the predetermined background image in the notice effect display is not performed. On the other hand, the number of processes N is incremented by one each time step S729 is executed until it is determined in step S726 in FIG. 66 that the notice end timing has come. When the operation number of the operation switch 40 is detected in step S713, if the number of processes N is equal to or less than the step display upper limit value (step 715; No), the notice effect image in the notice effect display is displayed step by step. Will be processed. That is, in step S719, an alpha reference value is set as shown in FIG. 67 in correspondence with the processing number N that increases by 1 over time. In step S723, the comparison function is set to “satisfied if it is equal to or greater than the reference value”. At the same time, in step S724, as shown in FIG. Since the processing number N is incremented by one every time step S729 in FIG. 66 is executed, the value of the processing number N differs between 2 seconds and 5 seconds after the notice start timing, for example. In step S724, by setting the write destination head address corresponding to the number of processes N, the display position varies depending on the timing at which the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected (elapsed time from the notice start timing). Thus, the staged display of the effect image in the notice effect display is started. Based on these settings, the CPU 131 creates a test execution command and transmits it to the VDP 141 (step S725).

  In the VDP 141, for example, the drawing circuit 154 is based on image element data corresponding to each notice pattern temporarily stored in the automatic transfer area 155B, alpha value distribution setting data temporarily stored corresponding to each pixel, and the like. A pixel that satisfies the display condition because the alpha value equal to or greater than the alpha reference value indicated by the test execution command received from the effect control microcomputer 120 is set to the image display device 5 The display target pixel to be displayed is determined (step S572 in FIG. 82). The display target pixels thus determined are read out from the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 and written into the frame buffer memory 156 to be copied and stored, thereby creating display data (step). S573). On the other hand, since an alpha value less than the alpha reference value is set in step S572, the comparison result is not “satisfied” and the pixels that do not satisfy the display condition are stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155. Are not read and are not copied to the frame buffer memory 156 in step S573. Thereafter, display data stored in the frame buffer memory 156 is read by the display circuit 157, and gradation data corresponding to the read data is supplied to the image display device 5. Thereby, the display target pixel is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is limited for pixels that are not the display target pixel.

  Here, when the display target pixel is copied to the frame buffer memory 156 in step S573, the write destination address in the frame buffer memory 156 is included in the test execution command transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120. It can be determined based on the start address of the write destination indicated by the data. For example, the drawing circuit 154 specifies the position of the display target pixel in the effect image in the notice effect display (as a specific example, the coordinates of the display target pixel in the effect image), and sets an offset corresponding to the position. By adding to the start address of the write destination notified by the test execution command, it is possible to specify the write address when the display color data corresponding to each display target pixel is written to the frame buffer memory 156 and copied. . Then, the start address of the write destination in the frame buffer memory 156 is set corresponding to the processing number N as shown in FIG. 68, for example (step S724 in FIG. 66).

  In this way, based on the alpha reference value set corresponding to the processing number N, only the display target pixels whose comparison result is “established” and satisfy the display condition are transferred from the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155. By reading and writing in the frame buffer memory 156, the image is displayed at the display position determined based on the number of processes N in the display area of the image display device 5. With such control, for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) to 85 (F), the character image CH1 is changed from left to right as time passes in response to the determination that the operation switch 40 has been operated. It will be displayed step by step while moving. When such stage display ends, the character image CH1 is completely displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG.

  When the stage display is completed in this way, the stage display flag is cleared in step S721 in FIG. 66 and is turned off. Therefore, after the stage display ends, the alpha reference value is set to “0.01” in step S722 in response to the determination that the stage display flag is OFF in step S718. Since the minimum value of the alpha value in the alpha value distribution setting data shown in FIG. 31C is “0.01”, it corresponds to each pixel constituting the display image of the character image CH1 after the stage display ends. All the alpha values are equal to or greater than the alpha reference value, satisfying the display condition, and copied as display target pixels to the frame buffer memory 156 (steps S572 and S573 in FIG. 82). In step S724 in FIG. 66, the start address of the write destination in the frame buffer memory 156 is set corresponding to the processing number N that is incremented by 1 each time step S729 is executed. With this setting, after the stage display is finished, the character image CH1 is displayed in a completely displayed state so as to move from right to left in the display area of the image display device 5 as time elapses. The aspect will change. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), when the character image CH1 moves to the left end within the display area of the image display device 5, it is determined that it is the end timing of the notice (FIG. 66). In step S726; Yes), for example, in step S728, the display flag for notification is cleared and turned off, and a display control command for commanding redrawing of the background image is sent from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141. The effect image in the notice effect display may be deleted by transmitting it.

  After the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative design that causes the display result to be lost, or after the big hit gaming state is completed, the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied, so the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 When the demonstration display waiting time elapses without transmitting the variable display start command (step S293 in FIG. 60; Yes), setting for starting the demonstration screen display as illustrated in FIG. 61 is performed on the image display device 5. (Step S294). In response to the start of such a demonstration screen display, the CPU 131 executes a pre-transfer command process (step S296). By this pre-transfer command process, a pre-transfer command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 based on the table data read from the pre-transfer setting tables 211A and 211B corresponding to the value of the effect mode flag.

  In this way, an image set to have a high display frequency in response to the establishment of a transfer condition determined in advance corresponding to the progress of the game, that is, display start of the demo screen in the image display device 5. For the element data, a transfer from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is instructed. In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the pre-transfer process in response to receiving the pre-transfer command (step S404; Yes in FIG. 73), and the image notified by the pre-transfer command. Based on the read address, write address, data amount, etc. of the element data, the image element data is read from the CGROM 142 and transferred to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 (steps S441 to S445 in FIG. 75).

  Further, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is finished, the CPU 131 updates the variable display count value (step S358 in FIG. 64), and this variable display count count value has reached the pre-transfer execution determination value. In such a case (step S359; Yes), the CPU 131 executes a pre-transfer command process (step S360). Also in this pre-transfer command process, a pre-transfer command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 based on the table data read from the pre-transfer setting tables 211A and 211B corresponding to the value of the effect mode flag.

  In this way, the display frequency corresponding to the fact that the predetermined transfer condition corresponding to the progress of the game that the variable display count of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 has reached the advance transfer determination value is satisfied. Is transferred from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 for the image element data set so as to increase. In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the pre-transfer process in response to receiving the pre-transfer command (step S404; Yes in FIG. 73), and the image notified by the pre-transfer command. Based on the read address, write address, data amount, etc. of the element data, the image element data is read from the CGROM 142 and transferred to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 (steps S441 to S445 in FIG. 75).

  In addition, the CPU 131 executes a pre-transfer command process in response to the establishment of a predetermined transfer condition corresponding to the progress of the game, for example, control to the big hit game state is started. As a result, the image element data set so as to increase the display frequency may be instructed to be transferred from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155.

  The transfer control circuit 152 is provided in the VDP 141 when the transfer of the image element data by writing the image element data read from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is completed. The index table 251 is updated.

  For example, when data transfer from the CGROM 142 corresponding to the advance transfer command to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is completed (step S445 in FIG. 75; Yes), the data is transferred to the fixed address area 155A. Data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can specify image element data is written in the index table 251 and the corresponding “reading completion flag” is set to “on”. The completion of the transfer of the image element data is registered (step S446).

  For example, when data transfer from the CGROM 142 according to the automatic transfer display command to the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is completed (step S465 in FIG. 76; Yes), the automatic transfer area 155B is entered. The data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the transferred image element data is written in the index table 251 and the corresponding “read completion flag” is set to “on”. The image element data transfer completion is registered in the table 251 (step S466). Based on the registered contents of the index table 251, the drawing circuit 154 can determine whether or not the image element data can be read out from the image element temporary storage memory 155 and display data can be created.

  For example, in response to receiving the fixed address designation display command, the drawing circuit 154 displays the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image element data to be read from the fixed address area 155A in the index table 251 as “ It is determined whether or not “ON” (step S522 in FIG. 79). At this time, if the “reading completion flag” is “ON” (step S522; Yes), the drawing circuit 154 reads the image element data from the fixed address area 155A and determines that display data can be created. Then, the image element data read from the fixed address area 155A is written into the frame buffer memory 156 and stored therein, and processing for creating display data is executed (steps S523 to S526). On the other hand, if the “reading completion flag” is “off” (step S522; No), the drawing circuit 154 cannot read the image element data from the fixed address area 155A and create display data. Based on the determination, until the transfer completion waiting time elapses (step S527; No), the process of step S522 is repeatedly executed and waits. During this standby, display data creation using the image element data read from the fixed address area 155A is not executed.

  Also, for example, in response to receiving the automatic transfer display command, the drawing circuit 154 displays a “transfer completion flag” associated with image element data to be read from the automatic transfer area 155B in the index table 251. It is determined whether or not it is “ON” (step S542 in FIG. 80). At this time, if the “reading completion flag” is “ON” (step S542; Yes), the drawing circuit 154 reads image element data from the automatic transfer area 155B and determines that display data can be created. Then, the image element data read from the automatic transfer area 155B is written and stored in the frame buffer memory 156, and processing for creating display data is executed (steps S543 to S547). On the other hand, if the “reading completion flag” is “off” (step S542; No), the drawing circuit 154 cannot read the image element data from the automatic transfer area 155B and create display data. Based on the determination, until the transfer completion waiting time elapses (step S548; No), the process of step S542 is repeatedly executed and waits. During this standby, display data creation using the image element data read from the automatic transfer area 155B is not executed.

  For example, after the display of the demonstration screen as shown in FIG. 61 is started in the image display device 5, in response to detection of a predetermined switch operation (for example, a pressing operation) in the operation switch 40, the effect control board 12 is operated from the operation switch 40. When the operation switch signal transmitted to is turned on (step S297 in FIG. 60; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is switched between “0” and “1” (steps S298 to S300). Based on the value of the effect mode flag that can be switched in this manner, for example, the CPU 131 executes the process of step S338 in FIG. 62, and the content of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined. In the process of step S338, one of the effect control pattern tables 221A and 221B shown in FIG. 29B is used in accordance with whether the value of the effect mode flag is “0” or “1”. Thus, the production control pattern is selected. Thus, by switching the value of the effect mode flag, the aspect of the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be determined.

  Then, when the CPU 131 switches the value of the effect mode flag by the processing of steps S298 to S300 shown in FIG. 60, the advance transfer command processing is executed in step S301. In this pre-transfer command process, a pre-transfer command is created based on the table data read from either of the pre-transfer setting tables 211A and 211B corresponding to the value of the effect mode flag switched by the processes of steps S298 to S300. And transmitted to the VDP 141. For example, when the value of the effect mode flag is switched from “1” to “0”, advance transfer prepared in correspondence with the first effect mode # 1 specified by the effect mode flag after switching. The advance transfer command is created using the setting table 211A. On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode flag is switched from “0” to “1”, advance transfer prepared in correspondence with the second effect mode # 2 specified by the effect mode flag after switching. The advance transfer command is created using the setting table 211B.

  Thus, when the mode of the presentation operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed by switching the value of the presentation mode flag, the advance transfer setting table corresponding to the presentation mode determined as the mode of the presentation operation after the change. By using either 211A or 211B, the image element data set to increase the display frequency in the image display device 5 is specified. Then, a pre-transfer command for instructing transfer of the image element data specified at this time is created by the CPU 131 and transmitted to the VDP 141. In the VDP 141, for example, the transfer control circuit 152 executes a pre-transfer process in response to receiving the pre-transfer command (step S404; Yes in FIG. 73) and notifies the image notified by the pre-transfer command. Based on the read address, write address, data amount, etc. of the element data, the image element data is read from the CGROM 142 and transferred to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 (steps S441 to S445 in FIG. 75).

  In the image display device 5, at the predetermined timing when the total variable display time of the decorative design has elapsed after the variable display of the decorative design has started, the variation of the decorative design in the “medium” variable display unit ends, The variable display of the symbol is stopped, and the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, when there is an execution of the probability variation re-drawing effect, based on the determination result in step S325 shown in FIG. 63 (step S325; Yes), the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is determined. (Step S327). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5, and is shown in FIG. 86 (B). In this way, the same normal symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “2”) is stopped and displayed on each of the “left” and “right” variable display units, thereby reaching a reach. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86C, the same normal symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “2”) is also stopped and displayed on the “middle” variable display section. Thus, the definite decorative symbols of the normal jackpot combination in which the same normal symbols are arranged are derived and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5.

  On the other hand, when the type of the variable display result is “first probability variation big hit” or “second probability variation big hit”, and there is no execution of the probability variation re-lottery effect, but there is an advantageous open re-lottery effect. Is determined based on the determination result in step S328 shown in FIG. 63 (step S328; Yes), the determined decorative symbol of the first probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S330). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5, and is shown in FIG. 86 (E). As described above, the same first probability variation symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “1”) is stopped and displayed on each of the “left” and “right” variable display portions, thereby reaching a reach. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the same first probability variable symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the numeral “1”) is also stopped and displayed on the “middle” variable display section. In this way, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5, the definite decorative symbols of the first probable big hit combination with the same first probable variable symbols are derived and displayed. become.

  Further, when the type of the variable display result is “second probability variation big hit” and neither the execution of the probability variation re-lottery effect nor the execution of the advantageous open re-lottery effect is performed, the determination in step S329 shown in FIG. 63 is performed. Based on the result (step S329; No), the confirmed decorative symbol of the second probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S331). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5, and is shown in FIG. 86 (H). As described above, the same second probability variable symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “7”) is stopped and displayed on each of the “left” and “right” variable display units, thereby reaching a reach. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (I), the same second probability variable symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7”) is also stopped and displayed on the “middle” variable display section. Thus, the definite decorative symbols of the second probability variation jackpot combination in which the same second probability variation symbols are aligned are derived and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions in the image display device 5. become.

  When there is both the execution of the probability variation re-lottery effect and the execution of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect, as described above, the definite decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result. At this time, a predetermined jackpot notification image may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player or the like that a jackpot has occurred. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can cause the player or the like to determine that the decorative display variable display result is usually a big hit.

  Subsequently, after the big hit gaming state is started, for example, during a period in which the image display device 5 displays a predetermined round number notification image in response to the start of the first round which is the first round. Thus, it is the production start timing for starting the probability variation re-lottery production (step S803 in FIG. 71; Yes). In response to this, the CPU 131 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the effect mode in the probability variation re-drawing effect by executing the process of step S804. For example, based on the fact that the variable display result type is “second probability variation jackpot”, the first probability variation symbol (for example, the symbol designating the number “1”) is used as the decoration symbol derived and displayed as the execution result of the probability variation re-lottery effect. To decide. Further, by displaying a predetermined re-lottery notification image on the image display device 5, the player or the like may be informed that the probability variation re-lottery effect is executed.

  Then, in the image display device 5, for example, the decorative design is variably displayed on each variable display unit from the state where the fixed decorative design derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative design is stopped. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative design of the first jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the execution result of the probability variation re-drawing effect. For example, the first probability variable design (for example, a decorative design indicating the number “1”) determined in step S804 in FIG. 71 may be derived and displayed. At this time, a predetermined probability change re-lottery result notification image may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify a player or the like that the game state is controlled to the probability change game state as a result of the re-lottery.

  Thereafter, for example, in response to the start of the fifteenth round, which is the final round, the advantageous reopening lottery effect is started during a period in which the image display device 5 is displaying a predetermined number of rounds notification image. For the production start (step S823 in FIG. 72; Yes). In response to this, the CPU 131 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the effect mode in the advantageous open re-lottery effect by executing the process of step S824. For example, based on the fact that the type of the variable display result is “2nd probable big hit”, the decorative design that is derived and displayed as the execution result of the advantageous reopening lottery effect is the second probable design (for example, a decorative design showing the number “7”). ). Further, by displaying a predetermined re-lottery notification image on the image display device 5, the player or the like may be notified that the advantageous open re-lottery effect is executed.

  And in the image display apparatus 5, the predetermined effect image corresponding to an advantageous open re-lottery effect is displayed, for example. In this case, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the second probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as the execution result of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect. For example, the second probability variation symbol determined in step S824 in FIG. 72 (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the number “7”) may be derived and displayed. At this time, a predetermined advantageous opening re-lottery result notification image may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player or the like that the game is controlled to the second probability variation gaming state as a result of the re-lottery. Thereafter, when the big hit gaming state is ended, a predetermined big hit end notification image may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, in a predetermined period in which decorative symbols are variably displayed, it is possible to execute a notice effect display in which the display of the effect image changes with the passage of time. Yes, in response to the operation switch 40 being operated, effect images such as the character images CH1 to CH4 and the predetermined background image used in the notice effect display are displayed step by step. Thus, by displaying the display image in the notice effect display step by step in response to the operation switch 40 being operated, a visually novel notice effect display can be executed, and the symbol is being variably displayed. It is possible to improve the production effect in the notice production display executed at the same time. In addition, a notice effect display can be executed without a sense of incongruity in a predetermined period corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 40. Further, in response to the start timing of the notice effect display before the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected in the notice display period during which the notice effect display can be executed, the effects used for each notice pattern from the CGROM 142. Image element data for displaying an image is read out and transferred to the image element temporary storage memory 155. Thereafter, in response to the detection of the operation of the operation switch 40 during the notice display period, the alpha value indicated by the alpha value data corresponding to each pixel temporarily stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155, and the alpha reference value From the comparison result, only the display target pixel is copied to the frame buffer memory 156. Therefore, it is not necessary to specify image data to be read from the CGROM 142 after the operation switch 40 is operated, so that the control burden in displaying the notice effect can be reduced.

  Of the plurality of types of image element data stored in the CGROM 142, the image element data corresponding to the effect image set to increase the display frequency on the image display device 5, for example, the advance transfer setting table 211A. The table data indicating the read address, the write address, and the data amount is stored in FIG. 56, and the CPU 131 executes the advance transfer instruction process in step S63 of FIG. To be transferred to. In response to this command, in the VDP 141, the transfer control circuit 152 reads out the image element data from the CGROM 142 and transfers it to the fixed address area 155A by executing a pre-transfer process in step S405 of FIG. Then, the CPU 131 executes various update target command processing in step S701 in FIG. 65, and in accordance with the determination result that the image element is the target of advance transfer in step S742 in FIG. 69, the fixed address in step S746. A designated display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141. In the VDP 141, in response to the reception of the fixed address designation display command, the drawing circuit 154 executes the fixed address designation display process in step S503 in FIG. 78, whereby the image element read from the read address in the fixed address area 155A. Data is written and stored at a write address in the frame buffer memory 156. Thereby, for the image element data set so that the display frequency in the image display device 5 is increased, the data stored in advance in the image element temporary storage memory 155 by designating the read address in the fixed address area 155A. Can be easily reused and there is no need to read from the CGROM 142 every time, so the control burden on the display effect can be reduced.

  On the other hand, among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the CGROM 142, for example, table data indicating a read address, a write address, and a data amount corresponding to any of the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B are stored. For image element data that has not been processed, the CPU 131 executes various update target command processing in step S701 in FIG. 65, and according to the determination result that the image element data is not an image element to be pre-transferred in step S742 in FIG. In step S750, an automatic transfer display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141, thereby instructing transfer from the CGROM 142 to the frame buffer memory 156. In the VDP 141 that has received the automatic transfer display command, the transfer control circuit 152 reads out the image element data from the CGROM 142 and executes the automatic transfer in the image element temporary storage memory 155 by executing the automatic transfer control process in step S407 of FIG. Transfer to area 155B. In response to the reception of the automatic transfer display command, the drawing circuit 154 executes automatic transfer display processing in step S505 in FIG. 78, whereby the image element data read from the automatic transfer area 155B is stored in the frame buffer memory. Write to the write address at 156 and store. As a result, image element data that is not subject to advance transfer can be displayed without specifying the storage address in the automatic transfer area 155B if the read address in the CGROM 142 and the write address in the frame buffer memory 156 are specified. Can be used to create data, address management becomes easy, and the burden of program design can be reduced.

  For example, a game such as the start of display of a demo screen on the image display device 5, the display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 has reached the pre-transfer determination value, or the control to the big hit gaming state has started. In response to the establishment of a predetermined transfer condition corresponding to the progress state of the image, the CPU 131 executes the pre-transfer command process, and the image element data set so as to increase the display frequency by executing the pre-transfer command process. Is transferred to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155. In response to this command, in the VDP 141, the transfer control circuit 152 reads out the image element data from the CGROM 142 and transfers it to the fixed address area 155A by executing a pre-transfer process in step S405 of FIG. As a result, even if an error due to noise or the like occurs in the stored content of the fixed address area 155A, the stored content can be automatically restored.

  Further, when the drawing circuit 154 of the VDP 141 reads the image element data from the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155, the corresponding “transfer completion flag” in the index table 251 is “ON”. In response to whether or not the image data is set, whether to create display data by writing the read image element data into the frame buffer memory 156 is determined. As a result, the image element data transferred from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155, and read from the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B to create display data. It is possible to match the image element data to be used. If the “transfer completion flag” is “off”, the transfer is not completed yet, and the image element data is not read from the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B, and the transfer is completed. Control is performed so that incomplete display is not performed using non-image element data. Thus, a display effect using appropriate image element data can be performed.

  When the CPU 131 switches the value of the effect mode flag by the processing of steps S298 to S300 shown in FIG. 60, the pre-transfer command process is executed in step S301, so that the display frequency corresponds to the changed effect mode. Is transferred from the CGROM 142 to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 for the image element data set so as to increase. In response to this command, in the VDP 141, the transfer control circuit 152 reads out the image element data from the CGROM 142 and transfers it to the fixed address area 155A by executing a pre-transfer process in step S405 of FIG. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the image element data set so as to increase the display frequency corresponding to the display mode of the effect image, and to further reduce the control burden in the display effect by effectively using the fixed address area 155A. Can do.

  When the operation switch 40 is operated during the notice display period in which the notice effect display can be executed, the alpha value indicated by the alpha value data corresponding to each pixel of the notice effect image temporarily stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155 is displayed. From the comparison result between the value and the alpha reference value, the display target pixel is read and copied to the frame buffer memory 156, while the pixel that is not the display target pixel is not copied to the frame buffer memory 156. In this way, the display target pixels are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is limited for pixels that are not display target pixels. As a result, a notice effect image such as an effect character and a predetermined background image in the notice effect display can be displayed step by step, so that a visually novel notice effect display can be executed, and a notice executed during variable display of identification information The production effect in the production display can be improved.

  When the highest priority interrupt setting (KHPR) stored in the ROM 115 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is a value other than “06h” or “07h”, the interrupt processing based on the error interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118 is performed. This is executed with priority over interrupt processing based on a reception interrupt request or transmission interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 118. When the CPU 114 is notified of an error interrupt request corresponding to the occurrence of an error in the serial communication circuit 118, such as an overrun error, noise error, framing error, or parity error, the CPU 114, for example, performs steps S31 and S32 shown in FIG. The serial communication operation in the serial communication circuit 118 can be immediately stopped by executing the above process and setting the transmission operation unit 302 and the reception operation unit 301 included in the serial communication circuit 118 to the unused state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent erroneous information from being transmitted due to the occurrence of an abnormality in serial communication.

  The CPU 131 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 displays the display results when the command 80XXh that is a variable display start command transmitted from the main board 11 is designated to execute the probability variation re-draw effect. Even if the final display result is specified as the probability variation big hit (either the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit) by the commands 9004h to 9007h, in the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, “2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”, and any one of the normal symbols indicating the numbers is used to derive and display a fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the probability variation re-lottery effect is further executed after notifying that the variable display result of the decorative symbol becomes a probability variation big hit and controlled to the probability variation gaming state.

  In addition, when the display result notification # 6 command 9006h is used to specify that the advantageous reopening lottery effect is to be executed, the CPU 131 displays the decorative pattern even if the final display result is specified as the second probability variation jackpot. In the variable display, a definite decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination or a first positive variation jackpot combination is derived and displayed. This prevents the inconvenience that the advantageous reopening lottery effect is further executed after notifying that the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbol becomes the second probability variation jackpot and is controlled to the second probability variation gaming state. be able to.

  When power supply is started, the CPU 114 included in the game control microcomputer 100 executes random number initial setting processing in, for example, step S16 shown in FIG. 41, thereby causing the random number circuit 113 to receive the random value MR1 for jackpot determination. Set to generate a random number. Thereafter, the CPU 114 is set to an interrupt enabled state by executing the process of step S19. Then, in step S16, for example, a process as shown in FIG. 42 is executed as a random number initial setting process. Based on the random number initial setting data (KRSS) read from the ROM 115 in step S101, the startup start value is determined in step S103. Identify settings. If the setting specified at this time is not the default value setting, the process of step S106 is executed, so that the start value at startup, which is the start value of the first round in the random number value generated by the random number circuit 113, is obtained. The determination is made based on an ID number which is unique identification information given to each game control microcomputer 100. As a result, the initial value of the random number that is updated after the power supply is started can be made different for each of the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, and the random number value generated in this way can be used for the jackpot determination disturbance. By using the numerical value MR1 to determine whether or not the variable display result in the special symbol game or the like by the special symbol display device 4 is “big hit”, the randomness of the random number is increased and illegal big hits are generated. Can be prevented.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, the display target pixel is determined based on the comparison result between the alpha value indicated by the alpha value data corresponding to each pixel of the notice effect image temporarily stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155 and the alpha reference value. In the above description, the display color data is read for only the display target pixel and written in the frame buffer memory 156, so that the notice effect image is displayed in stages as time passes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as it has an arbitrary configuration that can display the notice effect image step by step as time passes. As a specific example, the notice effect image may be displayed step by step as time elapses by sequentially synthesizing an effect image other than the notice effect image such as the notice effect image and the background image. Hereinafter, the configuration and operation (action) in this example will be described.

  In this case, in the ROM 132 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120, each effect image when the effect image other than the effect image is synthesized by combining the effect image and the effect image when the effect image is overlapped is generated. A blend rate data table including blend rate data defining the blend rate is prepared in advance. As a specific example of the blend rate data table, a blend rate A table 231A shown in FIG. 87A and a blend rate B table 231B shown in FIG. 87B are stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 132. Good.

  The blend rate A table 231A and the blend rate B table 231B indicate the number of processes N (N = K, K + 1,..., K + 50) that increases by 1 corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the composite image generation. Data and blend rate data as data indicating the blend rate are stored in association with each other. The blend rate data stored in the blend rate A table 231A is control data for sequentially decreasing the blend rate from “1” to “0” as time passes. The blend rate data stored in the blend rate B table 231B is control data for sequentially increasing the blend rate from “0” to “1” as time passes.

  In addition, a predetermined control command serving as an alpha synthesis command is prepared (defined) in advance as a display control command transmitted from the CPU 131 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141. The alpha synthesis command is a command for instructing image processing by alpha synthesis. Here, when alpha synthesis is executed, a plurality of effect images are combined at a blend rate corresponding to each image, and a combined image in which the effect images overlap is generated. For example, the alpha synthesis command includes data for notifying the VDP 141 of the effect image to be displayed, the blend rate setting, and the like.

  In the configuration as described above, the CPU 131 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 executes the process of steps S696 shown in FIG. Instead, the process proceeds to step S699, and the initial setting for setting the processing number N to the initial value “0” may be performed. Then, instead of the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88 is executed as the notice display command process in step S700.

  In the process shown in FIG. 88, similarly to step S711 in FIG. 66, it is determined whether or not the display update timing for notice has come (step S781). At this time, if it is determined that it is not the notice display update timing (step S781; No), the notice display command process is terminated as it is. If it is the advance display update timing in step S781 (step S781; Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance display flag is on as in step S712 of FIG. 66 (step S782). If it is off (step S782; No), it is determined whether or not the operation switch 40 has been operated in the same manner as in step S713 of FIG. 66 (step S783). If there is an operation of the operation switch 40 (step S783; Yes), the notice display flag is set to the on state (step S784), and the number of processes N is the same as in steps S714 and S715 of FIG. It is determined whether it is below the display upper limit value (step S785).

  If the processing number N is equal to or smaller than the step display upper limit value in step S785 (step S785; Yes), after the step display flag is set to the on state (step S786), as in steps S716 and S717 of FIG. ), The value of the number of processes N is substituted into the process determination value K (step S787). When the notice display flag is turned on at step S782 (step S782; Yes), when the processing number N is larger than the step display upper limit value at step S785 (step S785; No), or the processing at step S787 Is executed, it is determined in the same manner as in step S718 of FIG. 66 whether or not the stage display flag is on (step S788).

  If the stage display flag is ON in step S788 (step S788; Yes), the blend rate data corresponding to the processing number N is read (step S789). For example, in step S789, when the value of the effect mode flag is “0” and the notice effect by the notice pattern of the notice A is executed, the CPU 131 is an effect image other than the notice effect image and becomes the notice effect image. For the effect image combined with the character image CH1, blend rate data indicating a blend rate corresponding to the number N of processes is read from the blend rate A table 231A shown in FIG. Here, as the effect image combined with the character image CH1, a background image displayed at the same position as the display position of the character image CH1 determined corresponding to the number of processes N may be specified. In addition, the CPU 131 reads out blend rate data corresponding to the number N of processing from the blend rate B table 231B shown in FIG.

  After executing the process of step S789, it is determined whether or not the number of processes N is equal to the value obtained by adding “50” to the process determination value K (step S790) in the same manner as in step S720 shown in FIG. If they are equal (step S790; Yes), the step display flag is cleared and turned off (step S791) as in step S721 shown in FIG. If the stage display flag is OFF in step S788 (step S788; No), the blend rate of the notice effect image is set to “1” and the blend rate of effect images other than the notice effect image is set. It is set to “0” (step S792).

  If the number N of processes is different from the value obtained by adding “50” to the process determination value K in step S790 (step S790; No), or after executing any of the processes of steps S791 and S792, Information for specifying two effect images to be synthesized, such as effect images and effect images other than the notice effect image (for example, the image number of each effect image), and the blend of each effect image set in step S789 or step S792 Based on the rate or the like, an alpha synthesis command is created and transmitted to the VDP 141 included in the display control unit 121 (step S794).

  If there is no operation of the operation switch 40 in step S783 (step S783; No), or after executing the process of step S794, the same processes as steps S726 to S729 shown in FIG. 66 are executed. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the notice (step S795), and if it is the end timing of the notice (step S795; Yes), it is determined whether or not the notice display flag is on. (Step S796). At this time, if the notice display flag is off (step S796; No), the notice effect drawing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the notice display flag is on (step S796; Yes), the notice display flag is cleared and turned off (step S797), and the notice effect rendering process ends. If it is not the timing to end the notice in step S795 (step S795; No), the process number N is incremented by 1 (step S798), and the notice display command process is terminated.

  By executing the notice display command process as described above, for example, when the value of the effect mode flag is “0” and the notice effect by the notice pattern of the notice A is executed, as shown in FIG. With respect to the character image CH1 serving as the notice effect image, the blend rate corresponding to the processing number N is determined with reference to the blend rate B table 231B shown in FIG. It improves linearly from “0” to “1”. On the other hand, for a background image that is an effect image other than the notice effect image, the blend rate is determined by determining the blend rate corresponding to the processing number N with reference to the blend rate A table 231A shown in FIG. Decreases linearly from “1” to “0” over time.

  In the VDP 141 provided in the display control unit 121, in response to receiving the alpha synthesis command from the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, the drawing circuit 154 executes an alpha synthesis process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. In this alpha composition process, first, an alpha value corresponding to the blend rate specified from the data included in the alpha composition command is set for image element data indicating an effect image other than the notice effect image (step S851). For example, the drawing circuit 154 uses the blend rate specified based on the data included in the alpha compositing command as an alpha value for each pixel of the effect image other than the preview effect image, and an address corresponding to each pixel in the image element temporary storage memory 155 Write to.

  Subsequently, the drawing circuit 154 sets an alpha value corresponding to the blend rate specified from the data included in the alpha compositing command for the effect character that is the notice effect image and the image element data indicating the predetermined background image ( Step S852). For example, the drawing circuit 154 automatically transfers the blend rate specified based on the data included in the alpha synthesis command as the alpha value in each pixel of the notice effect image specified by the alpha synthesis command in the image element temporary storage memory 155. Write to the address corresponding to each pixel in area 155B.

  Thereafter, the drawing circuit 154 is based on the display color data in the effect image other than the notice effect image and the notice effect image stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155, the alpha value set in steps S851 and S852, and the like. A pixel value corresponding to each pixel in the composite image is specified, and display color data indicating the specified pixel value is generated (step S853). For example, in the process of step S853, the alpha value set in step S851 for the effect image other than the notice effect image is α1, and the alpha value set in step S852 for the effect image is α2, and the display color of each pixel is indicated. The pixel value is specified by performing an operation such as (pixel value in an effect image other than the notice effect image) × α1 + (pixel value in the notice effect image) × α2. The drawing circuit 154 creates display data indicating a composite image in which two effect images overlap each other by writing each pixel value thus specified to the frame buffer memory 156 (step S854).

  The data thus written in the frame buffer memory 156 is read by the display circuit 157, converted into gradation data, and output to the image display device 5. As a result, a composite image in which two effect images such as a notice effect image and an effect image other than the notice effect image overlap is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. When the operation switch 40 is operated during the notice display period in which the notice effect display can be executed, an alpha value corresponding to each pixel of the notice effect image temporarily stored in the image element temporary storage memory 155, and As shown in FIG. 89, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel in the effect image other than the preview effect image is set based on the blend rate that changes with the passage of time as shown in FIG. A notice effect image such as a background image is displayed step by step. Thereby, visually novel notice effect display can be executed, and the effect of the notice effect display executed during variable display of the identification information can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the alpha value distribution setting data for uniformly distributing the alpha values from the minimum value “0.01” to the maximum value “0.99” as shown in FIG. It has been described that the entire notice effect image such as the character images CH1 to CH4 and each background image is displayed in a stepwise manner as time elapses. On the other hand, data indicating an alpha value distribution different from the alpha value distribution setting data indicating the alpha value distribution as shown in FIG. 31 (C) is stored, and each decorative design corresponding to the data is stored. The alpha value of each pixel constituting the display image may be set. By using such data, the notice effect image may be displayed stepwise from a predetermined position in the image in a predetermined direction as time elapses. For example, the notice effect image may be displayed stepwise from the right end to the left end in the display image as time passes, or may be displayed stepwise from the left end to the right end, or from the upper end to the lower end. It may be displayed step by step, or may be displayed step by step from the lower end to the upper end. Or you may display in steps from an outer edge part to a center part, and you may display in steps from an outer edge part to a center part. Further, it may be displayed stepwise from the 0 o'clock position in the clockwise direction, or may be displayed stepwise from the 0 o'clock position in the counterclockwise direction. Even in this way, it is possible to execute visually variable display of a novel display symbol, and it is possible to improve the effect of rendering in the variable display of the symbol.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the advance transfer control process shown in FIG. 77 in response to receiving the advance transfer command from the effect control microcomputer 120, thereby giving the advance notice. The image element data corresponding to the effect image has been described as being read from the CGROM 142, transferred to the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155, and temporarily stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes an arbitrary configuration capable of reading image element data corresponding to each notice effect image from the CGROM 142 before display of the notice effect image is started in the notice display period. Anything is acceptable. For example, by registering image element data corresponding to the notice effect image in either of the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B, the notice effect is displayed before the display of the notice effect image is started in the notice display period. The image element data corresponding to the image may be read from the CGROM 142, transferred to the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155, and temporarily stored.

  Alternatively, one of a plurality of types of notice effect images prepared in advance corresponding to whether the effect operation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first effect mode # 1 or the second effect mode # 2. The image element data corresponding to the part of the notice effect image is registered in one of the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B, while the image element data corresponding to the other notice effect image is stored in the advance transfer setting table 211A or 211B. You may make it not register any. For example, the image element data indicating the character images CH1 and CH2 used in the respective notice patterns of notice A and notice B in the first effect mode # 1 is registered in the advance transfer setting table 211A, while notice C The image element data indicating the character images CH3 and CH4 used in each notice pattern of the notice D is not registered in any of the advance transfer setting tables 211A and 211B. Here, the character images CH1 and CH2 are images used in the notice A and the notice B that are executed with a higher probability than the notice C and the notice D when the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design is lost. Compared to the character images CH3 and CH4 used in the notice C and the notice D that are executed with a low probability, they are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at a higher frequency.

  When image element data corresponding to the notice effect image is transferred and temporarily stored in the fixed address area 155A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 as described above, for example, the drawing circuit 154 is sent from the effect control microcomputer 120. When the alpha value setting process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81 is executed in response to the reception of the alpha value distribution setting command, the alpha value of the image element data temporarily stored in the fixed address area 155A is also detected. What is necessary is just to make a setting. For example, when the drawing circuit 154 executes an alpha test process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82 in response to the reception of the test execution command from the effect control microcomputer 120, it is temporarily stored in the fixed address area 155A. With respect to the stored image element data, the display target pixel may be specified based on the comparison result between the alpha value and the alpha reference value. Furthermore, for example, when the alpha synthesis process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90 is executed in response to the drawing circuit 154 receiving the alpha synthesis command from the effect control microcomputer 120, it is temporarily stored in the fixed address area 155A. Also for the stored image element data, setting the alpha value corresponding to the pre-blend rate notified by the alpha compositing command, specifying the pixel value in the composite image with the effect image other than the notice effect image, etc. do it.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 131 executes the process of step S693 shown in FIG. 65 in the effect control microcomputer 120 to identify the image element corresponding to the effect image used in each of the notice patterns A to D. In step S696, a notice transfer command corresponding to the image element is transmitted to the VDP 141. Then, the transfer control circuit 152 executes the notice transfer control process shown in FIG. 77 in response to the receipt of the notice transfer command from the effect control microcomputer 120, thereby giving a notice in the notice display period. Image element data corresponding to each notice effect image can be read from the CGROM 142 before the display of the effect image is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the image element data corresponding to the type of notice executed in the notice display period can be read from the CGROM 142 before the notice effect image is displayed. May be. In this case, in step S693 in FIG. 65, for example, the type of the advance notice to be executed is specified by the display control data read from the effect control pattern, etc., and the advance notice command corresponding to the type of the advance notice is specified in step S696. Transmit to VDP 141. Then, the transfer control circuit 152 executes a process similar to the notice transfer control process shown in FIG. 77, and reads only image element data corresponding to the type of notice indicated by the notice transfer command from the CGROM 142. What is necessary is just to transfer to the image element temporary storage memory 155.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, the alpha reference value is set in step S719 corresponding to the number N of processes that are incremented by 1 each time the process of step S729 shown in FIG. It has been described that the notice effect image is displayed step by step as time elapses after the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected once in the display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by updating the alpha reference value every time an operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, the notice effect image is displayed stepwise according to the number of operations of the operation switch 40. You may do it. In this case, for example, an operation number counter for counting the number of operations of the operation switch 40 in the notice display period is provided in the effect control counter setting unit of the RAM 133 or the like. If it is determined in step S711 shown in FIG. 66 that the display update timing for notice is reached, whether or not the operation switch 40 has been operated without proceeding to step S712 and proceeding to step S712. Determine whether. At this time, if the operation switch 40 is operated, it is updated by adding 1 to the operation count value which is the value of the operation counter. Then, in the process of step S719, the alpha reference value may be set so that the notice effect image is displayed step by step corresponding to the operation count value.

  Alternatively, if it is determined in step S781 shown in FIG. 88 that it is the display update timing for notice, whether or not the operation switch 40 has been operated without proceeding to step S782 and proceeding to step S783. You may make it determine. At this time, if the operation switch 40 is operated, it is updated by adding 1 to the operation count value. In the process of step S789, the blend rate may be set so that the notice effect image is displayed step by step corresponding to the operation count value.

  In the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 34, image element data corresponding to the character image or background image used in each notice pattern is temporarily stored in a predetermined address area in the automatic transfer area 155B. Explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image element data corresponding to the character image or background image used in each notice pattern may be temporarily stored without fixing the address in the automatic transfer area 155B. Good. In this case, for example, when the transfer control circuit 152 specifies a write address in the automatic transfer area 155B in step S482 in FIG. 77, a character image, a background image, and the like sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the automatic transfer area 155B. When the writing address of the image element data corresponding to is specified and there is no free space, the writing address may be specified sequentially from the top of the automatic transfer area 155B. If there is no free space, each notice pattern is written in the automatic transfer area 155B by overwriting the image element data at the write address specified in step S482 or writing the image element data after clearing it. The image element data corresponding to the character image or background image used in the above may be temporarily stored. When image element data corresponding to the character image or background image used in each notice pattern is temporarily stored in the automatic transfer area 155B in this way, the image element data is stored in the automatic transfer control process shown in FIG. Similarly to the case of the transfer, the image element data write address in the automatic transfer area 155B may be notified to the drawing circuit 154 so that the image circuit data can be read out by the drawing circuit 154. Alternatively, the storage address in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element data corresponding to the character image, the background image, etc. is used as the identification information of each image element data (for example, the image number assigned to each character image or each background image, or the CGROM 142). It may be stored in a predetermined identification information table in association with the storage address of each image element data. When the drawing circuit 154 reads image element data corresponding to the character image or background image used in each notice pattern from the automatic transfer area 155B, the storage address associated with the identification information of the image element data is set. Alternatively, the identification information table may be read and specified.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in response to the transfer control circuit 152 receiving the notice transfer command from the effect control microcomputer 120, the notice transfer control process is executed in step S409 shown in FIG. Thus, the image element data corresponding to each notice effect image is read from the CGROM 142 and transferred to the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155. Thereafter, in response to the drawing circuit 154 receiving the alpha value distribution setting command from the effect control microcomputer 120, the alpha value setting process is executed in step S507 shown in FIG. 78, whereby the automatic transfer area 155B. In the above description, the alpha value of each pixel is set with respect to the image element data temporarily stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in response to the drawing circuit 154 receiving an alpha value distribution setting command from the effect control microcomputer 120, image element data corresponding to each notice effect image is obtained. After writing in a predetermined area (for example, a drawing buffer area) of the frame buffer memory 156, the alpha value of each pixel may be set. In this case, for example, in the alpha test process executed in step S509 shown in FIG. 78, the drawing circuit 154 reads and displays the display target pixel whose comparison result is “established” from the drawing buffer area of the frame buffer memory 156. While writing and storing in the buffer area, the pixel other than the display target pixel for which the comparison result is not “established” is restricted from being written to the display buffer area without being read from the drawing buffer area. You may do it. Then, the display circuit 157 may read out display data stored in the display buffer area, convert it into gradation data, and perform output to the image display device 5.

  Alternatively, in response to receiving the alpha value distribution setting command from the production control microcomputer 120, the transfer control circuit 152 executes an alpha value setting process similar to step S507 shown in FIG. The alpha value of each pixel may be set for the image element data temporarily stored in the transfer area 155B. Alternatively, the image element data corresponding to the character image or background image used in each notice pattern and the alpha value distribution setting data are combined and stored in the CGROM 142, and the transfer control circuit 152 gives a notice from the effect control microcomputer 120. When the notice transfer control process is executed in step S409 shown in FIG. 73 in response to the reception of the transfer command for image data, the alpha value distribution setting data is read from the CGROM 142 together with the image element data, and the image element temporary storage memory is read. By transferring to the automatic transfer area 155B of 155, the alpha value of each pixel may be set together with the transfer of the image element data.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description was given on the assumption that the fixed address designation display command and the automatic transfer display command are transmitted separately from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141 included in the display control unit 121. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an arbitrary instruction for instructing display of an image element by the image control microcomputer 120 writing image element data to the frame buffer memory 156 to the VDP 141 is sent. I just need it. For example, the VDP 141 includes a display control command register indicating that there has been a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120, and an image element to be read from the fixed address area 155 A of the image element temporary storage memory 155 or the CGROM 142. A read address register for storing a data read address is provided. Then, the CPU 131 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 rewrites the data stored in the display control command register provided in the VDP 141 to data indicating the ON state in the processing of steps S746 and S750 shown in FIG. The read address of the fixed address area 155A of the temporary storage memory 155 or the CGROM 142 is written to the read address register included in the VDP 141. In these processes, the VDP 141 may also be notified of the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156, the data amount of the image element data, and the like.

  In this case, VDP 141 reads the stored data in the read address register in response to the rewrite of the data stored in the display control command register to the data indicating the ON state, and the address indicated by the read data is the image. It is determined whether or not the address is included in the fixed address area 155A of the element temporary storage memory 155. At this time, if the address is included in the fixed address area 155A, the fixed address designation display process in step S503 is executed when it is determined that the drawing circuit 154 has received the fixed address designation display command in step S502 in FIG. By executing the same processing as, image element data specified based on the read data from the read address register can be read from the fixed address area 155A and written to the frame buffer memory 156. If the address indicated by the read data from the read address register is an address other than the fixed address area 155A, it is determined that the transfer control circuit 152 has received the automatic transfer display command in step S406 of FIG. The same process as the automatic transfer control process of step S407 executed in this case is executed, and when it is determined that the drawing circuit 154 has received the automatic transfer display command in step S504 of FIG. 78, the process of step S505 executed A process similar to the automatic transfer display process may be executed. By executing these processes, the transfer control circuit 152 reads the image element data specified based on the read data from the read address register from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the automatic transfer area 155B of the image element temporary storage memory 155. The drawing circuit 154 can read out the image element data from the automatic transfer area 155B and write it in the frame buffer memory 156.

  As described above, when the VDP 141 determines whether to read the image element data from the fixed address area 155A or the CGROM 142 based on the address indicated by the read data from the read address register, the effect control microcomputer On the side of the CPU 131 provided in 120, for example, display control data read from the effect control pattern without determining whether or not the image element is a target of advance transfer, as in the process of step S742 of FIG. The read address specified based on the above may be written to the read address register included in the VDP 141. That is, on the CPU 131 side provided in the effect control microcomputer 120, without distinguishing whether to transmit a display control command corresponding to a fixed address designation display command or a display control command corresponding to an automatic transfer display command, It is only necessary to execute the same type of processing that writes a read address specified based on display control data or the like to a read address register included in the VDP 141.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S545 shown in FIG. 80 that drawing has been completed, the transfer completion flag is cleared in step S547, whereby the image element data temporarily stored in the automatic transfer area 155B. It was explained that it should not be reused. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image element data temporarily stored in the automatic transfer area 155B may be reused. For example, the VDP 141 is provided with a use count counter for specifying the use frequency of each image element data temporarily stored in the automatic transfer area 155B.

  In this case, the transfer control circuit 152 performs, for example, the process of step S461 shown in FIG. 76 in the automatic transfer control process executed in step S407 when it is determined that the automatic transfer display command is received in step S406 of FIG. , The image element data read address in the CGROM 142 is specified, and it is verified whether the image element data read from this address is registered in the index table 251. If registered in the index table 251, the storage address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155 B specified from the index table 251 is not executed without executing the processing in steps S 462 to S 446 shown in FIG. The drawing circuit 154 may be notified. At this time, the value of the corresponding use number counter is updated by adding 1 for example.

  On the other hand, if the image element data whose read address is specified in step S461 is not registered in the index table 251, the write address of the image element data in the automatic transfer area 155B is specified as in step S462. To do. At this time, if there is no free area in the automatic transfer area 155B, for example, a storage area of image element data whose count value of the usage counter is equal to or less than a predetermined value is specified, and the image element data is overwritten in the storage area. The write address may be specified. Then, the “transfer completion flag” stored in the index table 251 corresponding to the image element data erased by overwriting is set to “off”, and data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” is erased. do it. Further, the usage counter corresponding to the image element data erased by overwriting may be initialized.

  Note that the method of specifying the image element data to be erased by overwriting is not limited to the method of specifying that the value of the use counter is equal to or less than a predetermined value, for example, specifying the old timing written in the automatic transfer area 155B. Any method can be used, such as a method to do so. Further, the timing of updating the value of the usage counter is not limited to the timing at which the transfer control circuit 152 specifies that the image element data is registered in the index table 251, and for example, the drawing circuit 154 supplies the frame buffer memory 156. It may be the timing when the writing is completed.

  Further, when a display area where various images are displayed and a non-display area where no image is displayed are provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the frame buffer memory 156 corresponds to the non-display area. You may make it restrict | limit that image element data are written in a memory | storage location. For example, when the display unit of the special symbol display device 4 is arranged on the back surface portion of the screen in the image display device 5, or when the decorative member is arranged on the front surface portion of the screen in the image display device 5, the special symbol display is performed. The front part of the apparatus 4 and the back part of the decorative member are not provided with a liquid crystal for displaying an image, a member constituting the liquid crystal (for example, a polarizing plate), a circuit for controlling the liquid crystal, and the like. Therefore, the non-display area remains transparent without displaying an image. On the other hand, on the back surface of the display area, for example, a backlight that irradiates the display area from behind, a concealing member that conceals the interior of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like may be provided. In this case, in the frame buffer memory 156, in order to facilitate address management, in the area for storing the display data, addresses are not only displayed on the display area on the screen of the image display device 5 but also on the non-display area. Assigned.

  In the configuration as described above, for example, the drawing circuit 154 executes any one of the processes in steps S523 and S526 shown in FIG. 79 or after executing any one of the processes in steps S543 and S546 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the image element data write destination in the frame buffer memory 156 is a non-display area. More specifically, it is specified from the write address specified from the data included in the fixed address designation display command or the automatic transfer display command, or the processing result in step S526 shown in FIG. 79 or the processing result in step S546 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the written address matches the address assigned to the non-display area on the screen of the image display device 5 in the frame buffer memory 156. It is determined that it becomes a display area. If the writing destination is a non-display area, the image element data is not read and written as in step S524 shown in FIG. 79 or step S544 shown in FIG. The process proceeds to the process and the process of step S545. In this way, the drawing circuit 154 does not perform the process of step S524 shown in FIG. 79 or the process of step S544 shown in FIG. 80 even when a fixed address designation display command or an automatic transfer display command is received. This restricts the writing of image element data to the frame buffer memory 156. As a result, compared to the case where image element data is written to the address of the frame buffer memory 156 assigned corresponding to the non-display area on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data is created, the control burden in the display effect is reduced. Can be reduced.

  Alternatively, for example, on the side of the production control microcomputer 120, a process for restricting writing to the frame buffer memory 156 when the writing destination is a non-display area may be executed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 131 specifies the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156 in step S744 or step S748 shown in FIG. 69, the image to be updated in the display specified in step S741. It is determined whether or not the element arrangement includes an arrangement corresponding to a non-display area on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the CPU 131 specifies the display position (for example, display coordinates) of the image element on the screen of the image display device 5 from the display control data read from the effect control pattern, and the size (for example, the width or height) of the image element to be displayed. From this, it is determined whether or not at least a part of the image element is arranged in the non-display area. If at least a part of the image element is arranged in the non-display area, it is determined that the image element includes an arrangement corresponding to the non-display area 5B.

  When it is determined that the layout corresponding to the non-display area is not included, the entire image element to be displayed is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the write address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156. After setting an address for display on the screen, the process proceeds to step S745 or step S749. For example, the CPU 131 displays the entire image element on the screen of the image display device 5 by designating the write address in the frame buffer memory 156 for all pixels constituting the image element to be displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the arrangement corresponding to the non-display area is included, the entire image element is arranged in the non-display area or a part is arranged in the non-display area. Judgment is made. At this time, when it is determined that a part is arranged in the non-display area and the whole is not arranged in the non-display area, the display address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156 is not displayed. After setting the address excluding the write destination corresponding to the area, the process proceeds to step S745 or step S749. For example, the CPU 131 specifies the write address in the frame buffer memory 156 for each pixel constituting the image element to be displayed, and excludes the address assigned to the non-display area from the write address, thereby displaying Only the address assigned to the area is set to be notified to the VDP 141. If it is determined that the entire image element is arranged in the non-display area, the process proceeds to step S751. Thereby, when the entire image element is arranged in the non-display area, the writing address of the image element data in the frame buffer memory 156 is not set, and the transfer display command is not transmitted to the VDP 141. Become.

  In this way, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the image element arrangement includes an arrangement corresponding to the non-display area. And if the layout corresponding to the non-display area is included, the write address excluding the write destination corresponding to the non-display area can be set, or the write address can not be set. The writing of image element data to the frame buffer memory 156 is restricted. As a result, compared to the case where image element data is written to the address of the frame buffer memory 156 assigned corresponding to the non-display area on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data is created, the control burden in the display effect is reduced. Can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect reach the effect start timing for the CPU 131 to start each effect based on the variable display start command and the display result notification command from the main board 11. It has been described that it is started when it is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on an arbitrary effect control command such as a jackpot start command or a jackpot end command from the main board 11, the CPU 131 has reached an effect start timing for starting each effect. It may be started when it is detected. Alternatively, a probability variation re-lottery effect start command or an advantageous release re-lottery effect start command is transmitted from the main board 11, and at the timing when these commands are received on the effect control board 12 side, the probability variation re-lottery effect or advantageous release re-release is performed. Each lottery effect may be started. Alternatively, when a jackpot round number notification command, a round game end command, or the like transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is received during the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation re-lottery effect or the advantageous open re-lottery effect is performed. It may be executed. Here, the round game end command indicates that the round game has ended. In this case, the jackpot round number instruction command and the round game end command may be set to indicate whether or not the probability variation re-lottery effect or the advantageous open re-lottery effect is performed. In the round in which the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect are executed, on the main board 11 side, for example, the CPU 114 makes the effect time in the round longer than in the case where these effects are not executed. The initial setting such as the timer value in the game control timer is performed. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the CPU 131 performs initial setting such as a timer value in the effect control timer so that the effect time in the round is longer than that in the case where these effects are not executed. . For example, in a round in which the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect are not executed, timer initial values corresponding to the effect time “5 seconds” are set in the game control timer and the effect control timer. On the other hand, in the round in which the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect are executed, timer initial values corresponding to the effect time “10 seconds” are set in the game control timer and the effect control timer.

  Further, the variable display start command may include EXT data indicating whether or not the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed, and the display result notification command may include EXT data indicating whether or not the probability-change re-lottery effect is executed. . In this case, for example, after executing the processing of steps S639 and S642 shown in FIG. 49 or step S648 shown in FIG. 50, the probability variation re-lottery execution determination table 185 shown in FIG. The numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the probability variation re-drawing effect execution updated by the above or the like is extracted. Then, with reference to the probability variation re-lottery execution determination table 185 based on the random value MR5, the control data corresponding to the determination result of whether or not it matches the performance execution determination value data and the determination results in steps S639, S642, and S648 Is set in the effect transmission command buffer to transmit a display result notification command indicating whether or not the probability variation re-lottery effect is to be executed. Further, if it is determined in step S671 shown in FIG. 51 that the big hit flag is on, the advantageous opening re-lottery execution determination table 186 shown in FIG. 14B is substituted for the processing in steps S672 to S674. And the numerical data indicating the random value MR6 for determining the advantageous opening re-lottery effect execution is extracted. Then, by referring to the advantageous opening re-lottery execution determination table 186 based on the random value MR6 and determining whether or not it matches the effect execution determination value data, it is determined whether or not the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed. Good. After that, when executing the process of step S684, whether or not to execute the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is set by setting control data corresponding to the execution of the advantageous opening re-lottery effect in the effect transmission command buffer. The variable display start command shown may be transmitted.

  Further, the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect are not limited to being executed during the round in the big hit gaming state, and may be executed at the start or end of the big hit gaming state, for example. As a specific example, when the probability variation re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, the main board 11 is, for example, executed using the data included in the jackpot start command or the like. May be notified to the production control board 12. At this time, on the side of the main board 11, for example, the CPU 114 has a longer presentation time for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state, as compared with the case where the probability variation re-lottery effect is not executed. Set the timer value etc. in the game control timer. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the timer value in the effect control timer is set so that the effect time for the CPU 131 to notify the start of the big hit gaming state is longer than that in the case where the probability variation re-lottery effect is not executed. Make settings for. For example, when the probability variation re-drawing effect is not executed, timer initial values corresponding to the effect time “5 seconds” for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state are set in the game control timer and the effect control timer. On the other hand, when the probability variation redrawing effect is executed, the timer initial value corresponding to the effect time “10 seconds” for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state is set to the game control timer and the effect control timer. set. Then, it is only necessary to perform an effect operation that becomes a probability-change re-lottery effect together with an effect informing the start of the big hit gaming state or in a predetermined period before or after the effect. As another example, when performing a probabilistic redrawing lottery effect at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the variable display of a decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit, or when the display result in the variable display is derived and displayed Then, a command indicating execution of the probability variation re-lottery effect is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Alternatively, using the data included in the variable display start command and the display result notification command, the main board 11 may notify the effect control board 12 that the probability variation re-lottery effect is executed. At this time, on the side of the main board 11, for example, the CPU 114 sets a timer value or the like in the game control timer so that the variable symbol variable display time is extended. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the CPU 131 sets a timer value or the like in the effect control timer so as to lengthen the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Then, after temporarily displaying the variable display result that is a big hit in the image display device 5, an effect operation that becomes a probability variation re-lottery effect is started, and for example, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is changed again. .

  As another specific example, when the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed using, for example, data included in the big hit end command. May be sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Alternatively, the main board 11 may notify the effect control board 12 that the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed using data included in the variable display start command and the display result notification command. At this time, on the side of the main board 11, for example, the effect time for the CPU 114 to notify the end of the big hit gaming state at the end of the big hit gaming state is set longer than that in the case where the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is not executed. The timer value in the game control timer is set. On the side of the production control board 12, for example, the timer value in the production control timer is set so that the production time for the CPU 131 to notify the end of the big hit gaming state is longer than that in the case where the advantageous opening re-lottery production is not executed. And so on. For example, when the advantageous open re-lottery effect is not executed, timer initial values corresponding to “5 seconds” for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state are set in the game control timer and the effect control timer. On the other hand, when the advantageous opening re-lottery effect is executed, the timer initial value corresponding to the effect time “10 seconds” for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is set as the game control timer and the effect control timer. Set to. Then, it is only necessary to perform an effect operation that becomes an advantageous open re-lottery effect together with an effect that notifies the end of the big hit gaming state or in a predetermined period before or after the effect.

  When the probability variation re-lottery effect or the advantageous open re-lottery effect is executed during the round in the big hit game state, for example, a large number of game balls win in a large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a short time. In some cases, a round may be completed in a short time. As a result, there is a possibility that the probability variation re-lottery effect and the advantageous opening re-lottery effect that have been executed during the round may end in the middle. On the other hand, with the effect of informing the start and end of the big hit gaming state, or during the predetermined period before or after these effects, an effect operation that becomes a probability variation re-lottery effect or an advantageous open re-lottery effect is performed. For example, it is possible to reliably perform the rendering operation over a predetermined period, and it is possible to prevent the probability-changing re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect from ending in the middle, and to ensure the result of the re-lottery. Etc. can be notified.

  When a predetermined condition predetermined in accordance with the progress of the game is satisfied, as in the case where the advance transfer instruction process is executed in step S301 shown in FIG. 60, step S360 shown in FIG. The storage area setting process similar to step S62 shown in FIG. 56 may be executed immediately before executing the instruction process. As described above, by executing the storage area setting process before executing the advance transfer command process, for example, the storage contents of the internal register for storing the address STADD serving as the start address and the address ENADD serving as the final address of the automatic transfer area 155B. Even if an error due to noise or the like occurs, an error occurs in the transfer operation such that, for example, data to be transferred to the automatic transfer area 155B is transferred to the fixed address area 155A by appropriately setting the stored contents. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S715 shown in FIG. 66 that the processing number N is larger than the step display upper limit value, it is determined in step S718 that the step display flag is off. In step S722, the alpha reference value is set to “0.01”. Therefore, when an operation of the operation switch 40 is detected within a predetermined period close to the notice end timing in the notice display period, the effect image in the notice effect display is immediately displayed in response to the switch operation. In this way, the player or the like can recognize that the notice effect display has been performed. On the other hand, for example, when it is determined in step S715 that the processing number N is larger than the step display upper limit value, the process proceeds to the process of step S726, so that the notice end timing within the notice display period. When the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected within a predetermined period close to, the notice effect display may be terminated without displaying the effect image in the notice effect display. Alternatively, in the process of step S726, the notification end timing is set to a timing that varies depending on whether the display flag for notification is on or off, so that the operation can be performed even when the number of processes N reaches the stage display upper limit value. When the operation of the switch 40 is not detected, the notice display period may be terminated at that time. For example, in the process of step S726, if the value of the number of processes N is “512” when the notice display flag is on, it is determined that the notice end timing is reached. On the other hand, when the notice display flag is OFF in step S726, if the value of the processing number N is the step display upper limit value, the notice end timing may be determined.

  Also, for example, the value of the processing number N at the time when it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated in step S713 of FIG. In some cases, by setting an alpha reference value different from the setting shown in FIG. 67 in step S719, the effect image in the notice effect display may be displayed step by step in a shorter time. . In this case, for example, when the processing number N is K ≦ N ≦ K + 9, an alpha reference value corresponding to the processing number N is executed by performing an operation of (alpha reference value) = 1−0.1 × (N−K). On the other hand, when the processing number N is N = K + 10, the alpha reference value may be determined to be “0.01”. Or you may make it determine the alpha reference value corresponding to the processing number N similar to said calculation from the alpha reference value determination table previously stored in ROM132. According to this example, the effect image in the notice effect display can be displayed step by step with the passage of time in about 1/5 of the time shown in FIG.

  In addition, when it is determined in step S785 shown in FIG. 88 that the number N of processes is larger than the step display upper limit value, it is determined in step S788 that the step display flag is off, thereby step S792. Then, the blend rate of the notice effect image is set to “1”, and the blend rate of other effect images such as the background image is set to “0”. Therefore, when an operation of the operation switch 40 is detected within a predetermined period close to the notice end timing in the notice display period, the notice effect image is immediately displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the switch operation. And the player or the like can recognize that the notice effect display has been performed. On the other hand, for example, when it is determined in step S785 that the processing number N is larger than the step display upper limit value, the process proceeds to the process of step S795, so that the notice end timing in the notice display period. When the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected within a predetermined period close to, the notice effect display may be terminated without displaying the notice effect image. Alternatively, in the process of step S795, the timing that differs depending on whether the display flag for notice is on or off is set as the notice end timing, so that the operation can be performed even if the number of processes N reaches the stage display upper limit value. When the operation of the switch 40 is not detected, the notice display period may be terminated at that time.

  For example, the value of the processing number N at the time when it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated in step S783 in FIG. If there is, the effect image in the notice effect display in a shorter time by setting the blend rate different from the setting by referring to the blend rate A table 231A and the blend rate B table 231B in step S789. May be displayed step by step.

  In the above embodiment, only when the drawing circuit 154 receives the test execution command from the effect control microcomputer 120, the alpha test process is executed in step S509 of FIG. 78, and the display target pixel is temporarily stored in the image element. The description has been made assuming that copying is performed from the memory 155 to the frame buffer memory 156. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the drawing circuit 154 always executes an alpha test process when reading stored data in the image element temporary storage memory 155 and reads only data corresponding to the display target pixel. You may make it write in the frame buffer memory 156. FIG. In this case, for image element data corresponding to the effect image other than the preview effect image displayed in the notice effect display, for example, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is set to “1” in the image element temporary storage memory 155. Keep it. On the other hand, the image element data corresponding to the effect image used in the notice pattern in the notice effect display among the notice patterns of the notice A to the notice D is obtained from the effect control microcomputer 120 as in the above embodiment. The alpha value indicated by the alpha value distribution setting command is set for each pixel. Further, the image element data corresponding to the effect image used in the notice pattern in which the alpha value is not specified by the alpha value distribution setting command is set so that the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is “0”. .

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the time when the variable display result of the decorative design is derived and displayed, in the period other than the notice display period, for example, the effect control microcomputer 120 applies to the VDP 141. By sending a command for notifying the alpha reference value and the comparison function, the alpha reference value is set to “1”, and the comparison function is notified that “if it is equal to or greater than the reference value”. Alternatively, the alpha reference value is set to “1” as the initial setting of the alpha reference value and the comparison function during the period in which the alpha reference value and the comparison function are not designated from the production control microcomputer 120 to the VDP 141. The comparison function may be set to “satisfied if the reference value is greater than or equal to the reference value”. In the drawing circuit 154, for example, even when a fixed address designation display command or an automatic transfer display command is received from the effect control microcomputer 120, the same process as the alpha test process in the above embodiment is executed to obtain a display target pixel. Data corresponding to the specified pixel is read from the image element temporary storage memory 155 and written to the frame buffer memory 156. Here, for example, even when the display of the effect image used in the notification effect display is instructed by a fixed address designation display command, an automatic transfer display command, or other commands instructing display of the image element, it is used in each notification pattern. As for the image element data corresponding to the effect image to be displayed, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is less than “1” (the range from “0.01” to “0.99” is used for the effect image used in the notice effect display) Since the effect images that are not displayed are set to “0”), each pixel in these effect images is not specified as a display target pixel, and corresponding data is not written to the frame buffer memory 156. Limited.

  On the other hand, when the notice display period is reached, the alpha reference value is set to “0” as in the periods other than the notice display period until it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated by the same processing as step S713 in FIG. 1 is set, and the comparison function is set to “satisfied if it is equal to or greater than the reference value”. Further, after it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated, the alpha reference value corresponds to the processing number N in the same period as steps S719 and S723 in FIG. In addition, the comparison function is set to be “established if it is equal to or greater than the reference value”. On the other hand, after it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated, the alpha reference value is set to “0” in the same manner as steps S722 and S723 in FIG. .01 "and the comparison function is set to" satisfy if it is greater than or equal to the reference value ". Thereby, after the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, during the period in which the stage display flag is on, the notice effect image is displayed in stages as time passes, and the stage display flag is off. In such a period, the notice effect image can be completely displayed.

  Further, the drawing circuit 154 is not limited to the case where the alpha synthesis command is received from the effect control microcomputer 120, but the alpha synthesis shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90 is always performed when the stored data of the image element temporary storage memory 155 is read, for example. A process similar to the process may be executed so that a plurality of images can be combined. In this case, a period other than the notice effect display image displayed in the notice effect display is a period other than the notice display period in the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the time when the result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is derived and displayed. For example, the image element data corresponding to the effect image is set so that the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is “1” in the image element temporary storage memory 155. On the other hand, the image element data corresponding to the effect image used in each notice pattern of notice A to notice D is set so that the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is “0”.

  In the drawing circuit 154, for example, even when a fixed address designation display command or an automatic transfer display command is received from the effect control microcomputer 120, processing similar to the above-described alpha synthesis processing is executed to correspond to each pixel in the synthesized image. Thus, the pixel value is specified, and data indicating the specified pixel value is written into the frame buffer memory 156. At this time, even if it is an effect image other than the notice effect image, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel in each effect image is set to various values in consideration of the context of each effect image. The effect images may be combined and displayed. Here, for example, even when the display of the effect image used in the notification effect display is instructed by a fixed address designation display command, an automatic transfer display command, or other commands instructing display of the image element, it is used in each notification pattern. Since the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is set to “0” for the image element data corresponding to the produced effect image, each pixel in these produced images does not affect the pixel value of the composite image. The pixel value in the notice effect image is restricted from being written in the frame buffer memory 156.

  On the other hand, when it is the notice display period, until it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated by the process similar to step S783 in FIG. 88, the period other than the notice effect image is the same as the period other than the notice display period. For the effect image, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is set to “1”, and for the notice effect image, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel is set to “0”. Further, after it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated, during the period in which the stage display flag is on, other than the effect image used in the notification effect display and the notification effect image at the display position of the effect image For the effect image (for example, a background image corresponding to “no notice”), the blend rate is set corresponding to the number of processes N in the same manner as in step S789 in FIG. On the other hand, after it is determined that the operation switch 40 has been operated, the blend ratio of the notice effect image is set to “similarly to step S792 in FIG. “0” and the blend ratio of other effect images is set to “1”. At this time, the rendering circuit 154 sets an alpha value corresponding to the blend rate by the same processing as steps S851 and S852 in FIG. Thereby, after the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected, during the period in which the stage display flag is on, the notice effect image is displayed in stages as time passes, and the stage display flag is off. In such a period, the notice effect image can be completely displayed.

  Alternatively, the CPU 131 included in the effect control microcomputer 120 sets the alpha reference value and the comparison function and executes the test even when it is determined in step S713 shown in FIG. 66 that the operation switch 40 is not operated, for example. The command may be transmitted to the VDP 141. In this case, when it is determined in step S713 that the operation switch 40 is not operated, the CPU 131 sets, for example, the alpha reference value as “1” and the comparison function as “established when the reference value is equal to or greater than”. Then, the test execution command may be transmitted to the VDP 141 in the same manner as the process of step S725 shown in FIG. 66, and then the process may proceed to step S726. Thus, until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected during the notice display period, the alpha value corresponding to each pixel constituting the notice effect image is less than the alpha reference value. The writing of the image element data to the frame buffer memory 156 is restricted, and the notice effect image can be prevented from being displayed.

  For example, even when it is determined in step S783 in FIG. 88 that the operation switch 40 is not operated, the blend ratio of the notice effect image and the blend rate of other effect images are set, and the alpha composition command is sent to the VDP 141. Alternatively, it may be transmitted. In this case, when it is determined in step S783 that the operation switch 40 is not operated, the CPU 131 sets, for example, the blend rate of the notice effect image to “0” and the blend rate of other effect images to “1”. Set up. Then, the alpha synthesis command may be transmitted to the VDP 141 in the same manner as the process in step S794 shown in FIG. 88, and then the process may proceed to step S795. Even in this case, the blending rate of the notice effect image is set to “0” until the operation of the operation switch 40 is detected in the notice display period, so that the notice effect image is not displayed. it can.

  In the embodiment described above, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is described as being controlled to one of the normal gaming state, the first probability variation gaming state, and the second probability variation gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to any one of the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the advantageous open gaming state. . Here, the normal game state is a game state similar to the normal game state in the above-described embodiment, and the probability variation game state is a game state similar to the first probability variable game state in the above-described embodiment. In addition, the advantageous open gaming state may be a gaming state in which the probability change control is not performed and the game ball is easier to win the start winning opening than the normal gaming state or the probability changing gaming state.

  In this case, for example, in the game state determination tables 192 to 194 shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, “probability change game” indicating that “first probability change game state determination value data” is controlled to the probability change game state. After the end of the big hit gaming state, the “second determined change gaming state determination value data” is replaced with the “favorite opening gaming state determination value data” indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous opening gaming state. It is sufficient to determine whether to control the gaming state in the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, or the advantageous opening gaming state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description was given on the assumption that the notice effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the notice effect display for notifying that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a notice effect image is displayed in order to give a notice that a special symbol or a decorative symbol is in a predetermined display mode, for example, that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes reach. What is necessary is just to display on the screen of the display apparatus 5. FIG.

  As a specific operation example in the case of notifying that the decorative symbol variable display mode is reach, in the process of step S333 shown in FIG. 62, whether the variable display pattern is a reach pattern as in step S322. Determine whether or not. At this time, if the variable display pattern is a reach pattern, for example, a reach announcement determination table configured in the same manner as the big hit announcement determination table 202 shown in FIG. 24B is set. On the other hand, when the variable display pattern is not a reach pattern, for example, a normal losing time notice determination table configured similarly to the losing time notice determination table 201 shown in FIG. 24A is set. Thereafter, by performing the same processing as steps S336 and S337 shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not to execute the notification based on the random number SR1 for determining the notification, and the notification pattern in the case of executing the notification A decision or the like may be made. In this specific example, in the selection probability of the notice according to each notice pattern shown in FIG. 24 (C), the selection probability at the “losing time” indicates the selection probability at the “ordinary loss”, and the selection probability at the “big hit time” is This indicates the selection probability in “reach”.

  Based on the selection probability of the notice by each notice pattern, the degree of expectation that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will reach when the notice effect display by each notice pattern is performed (that is, the reach when the notice appears) Reach reliability) (reach reliability for advance notice). For example, the reach reliability of the notice by each notice pattern is ((selection probability of the notice pattern at the time of reach) × (reach probability)) / ((selection probability of the notice pattern at the time of normal loss) × (normal loss probability) ) + (Selection probability of the notice pattern at the time of reach) × (reach probability)).

  The notice effect display for notifying that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes reach is, for example, the variable display of “left” and “right” in the image display device 5 after the variable symbol display is started. Since the decorative design fluctuates in at least one of the sections, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be performed in a period that is not yet reached. On the other hand, as described in the above embodiment, when it is predicted that the variable display result will be a big hit by the notice effect display, the display result in the variable display is started after the variable display of the decorative design is started. The notice effect display may be performed before the derivation display, and the notice effect display may be performed during a predetermined period before or after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached. The notice effect display may be performed in a predetermined period before and after the timing when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes reach. Thus, the period during which the notice effect display can be executed may be a period including before or after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes reach.

  In the above embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit game state can be recognized by the number indicated by the confirmed decorative symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display color and shape of the fixed decorative pattern derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative pattern, the character added to each fixed decorative pattern, etc., or a combination thereof Thus, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be recognized.

  In addition, if the gaming machine of the present invention has an image display device in a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine, for example, a general electric machine or a ball game machine with a probability setting function called a Pachi-Con It does not matter. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of winning balls, and encloses game balls and gives points in response to detection of winning balls. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine.

  Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium, but preinstalled in a storage device such as a computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form distributed by keeping it. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variable display start command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a display result notification command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the command transmitted / received between the main board | substrate and the payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows one structural example of a random number circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a normal hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a re-lottery execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable display pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a game state determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination rate of a gaming state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting of the probability change flag and advantageous release flag according to a game state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a serial communication circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for production control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value for the notice determination counted on the side of the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a notice determination table, and an example of the selection probability of a notice. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display with the image display apparatus corresponding to having selected the notice pattern of the notice A and the notice B in the 1st production mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display with the image display apparatus corresponding to having selected the notice pattern of the notice C and the notice D in the 1st production mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display with the image display apparatus corresponding to not having performed a notice in the case of 2nd production mode, or having selected each notice pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a prior transfer setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern. It is explanatory drawing about alpha value distribution setting data. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a display control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in an image element temporary storage memory. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in an automatic transfer area. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an image element temporary storage memory. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a frame buffer memory. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an index table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display control command transmitted to VDP from the microcomputer for production control. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory content in CGROM. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for payout control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial communication error interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start time process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of big hit probability change determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display result setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display result setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start port opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory area setting command process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prior transfer command process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start command reception waiting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display control setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display control setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during symbol variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display update command process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice display command process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of an alpha reference value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the write-in start address. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various update object command processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a probability change re-lottery effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an advantageous open re-lottery effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a storage area setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pre-transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an automatic transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the transfer control process for an advance notice. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fixed address designation | designated display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an automatic transfer display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an alpha value setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an alpha test process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of payout control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for payout control. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of the notice effect image in a notice effect display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a blend rate table. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a notice display command process. It is a figure which shows the example of a time change of a blend rate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an alpha synthetic | combination process.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4 ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6 ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Power supply board 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Signal relay board 15 ... Discharge control board 16 ... Interface board 17 ... Launch control board 20 ... Normal symbol display device 21 ... Gate switch 22 ... Start switch 23 ... V Winning switch 24 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation knob 40 ... Operation switch 41 ... Passing gate 50 ... Dispensing motor 70 ... Card unit 81, 82 ... Solenoid 100 ... Game control microcomputers 111, 271 ... Clock circuit 112, 272 ... Reset / Interrupt controller 113, 134 ... Random number circuits 114, 131, 273 ... CPU
115, 132, 274 ROM
116, 133, 275 ... RAM
117, 276 ... Timer circuits 118, 277 ... Serial communication circuits 119, 135, 278 ... I / O port 120 ... Production control microcomputer 121 ... Display control unit 122 ... Sound control unit 123 ... Lamp control unit 141 ... VDP
142 ... CGROM
150 ... Discharge control microcomputer 151 ... Host interface 152 ... Transfer control circuit 153 ... CGROM interface 154 ... Drawing circuit 155 ... Image element temporary storage memory 155A ... Fixed address area 155B ... Automatic transfer area 156 ... Frame buffer memory 157 ... Display circuit 160 ... Game control data holding area 161A ... Special figure storage unit 161B ... Normal figure storage unit 162 ... Fixed special symbol storage unit 163 ... Game control flag setting unit 164 ... Game control timer setting unit 165 ... Game control counter setting unit 166 ... Game control buffer setting unit 171 ... Clock signal output circuit 172 ... Initial value setting circuit 173 ... Random number generation circuit 174 ... Timer circuit 175 ... Latch signal generation circuit 176 ... Random value register 181, 1 2 ... Big hit determination tables 183 and 184 ... Normal hit determination tables 185 and 186 ... Re-lottery execution determination table 187 ... Variable display pattern tables 188 to 191 ... Pattern determination tables 192 to 194 ... Game state determination tables 201 and 202 ... Notice determination table 211, 211A, 211B ... Advance transfer setting tables 221, 221A, 221B ... Production control pattern tables 231A, 231B ... Blend rate table 251 ... Index table 301 ... Reception operation section 302 ... Transmission operation section 303 ... Serial communication data register 304 ... Serial Status register 305 ... Serial control register

Claims (9)

A plurality of types of effect images including a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified each are displayed, and a plurality of types of images that can be identified by the variable display start condition being satisfied after the variable display execution condition is satisfied An image display means for performing variable display of identification information, and after the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Display control means for controlling the display operation of the image display means,
The game control means includes pre-decision means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is set as the specific display result according to the establishment of the variable display start condition,
The display control means includes
Display content determination means for determining the display content of the image display means based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
Image display control means for controlling the image display of the effect image in the image display means based on the determination result of the display content determination means,
The image display control means includes
Image element data storage means for storing a plurality of types of image element data including image element data corresponding to the effect image;
Temporary storage means for temporarily storing image element data read from the image element data storage means;
Data processing means for executing processing for creating display data of the effect image in the image display means based on image element data;
Display data storage means for storing display data created by the data processing means;
Display data output means for outputting the display data read from the display data storage means to the image display means,
The display content determination means includes
In response to the activation of the display control means, a startup setting control means for controlling various setting operations in the image display control means;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the variable display of the identification information is predetermined by the predetermined notice effect image of the effect image in a predetermined period of the period in which the identification information is variably displayed by the image display means. A notice effect display determining means for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect display for notifying that a display mode is to be executed;
Display image update command means for notifying the image display control means of the reading position of the image element data and the writing position in the display data storage means, and for instructing update of the display image in the image display means;
Operation determining means for determining whether or not the operating means has been operated,
The data processing means includes
When the read position of the image element data notified from the display image update command means is included in the temporary storage means, the image element data is read from the read position in the temporary storage means and written in the display data storage means First image element data processing means for writing and storing the position;
When the read position of the image element data notified from the display image update command means is included in the image element data storage means, the image element data is read from the read position in the image element data storage means and the temporary storage means Second image element data processing means for reading the image element data from the predetermined area and writing and storing it in the writing position in the display data storage means after transferring to the predetermined area;
The predetermined period is started for image element data including display color data of each pixel constituting the notice effect image based on the decision to execute the notice effect display by the notice effect display determination means. Notice image element data reading means to be read before,
Control data setting means for setting control data for controlling the display operation of the notice effect image corresponding to the image element data read by the notice image element data reading means;
Based on the image element data read by the preview image element data reading means and the control data set by the control data setting means, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determining means during the predetermined period. In correspondence with what has been made, including a stage display update means for updating the display data so as to display the notice effect image step by step with the passage of time,
The startup setting control means includes:
A startup area setting control means for setting a storage area in the temporary storage means to a plurality of areas including the predetermined area;
Following the setting by the startup area setting control means, among the plural types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means, the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the image element data is Start-up transfer setting control means for transferring and storing image element data higher than the execution frequency of image display by an effect image corresponding to required image element data in a storage area other than the predetermined area in the temporary storage means; including,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The display content determination unit is configured to display the image element among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage unit when a predetermined transfer condition corresponding to the progress of the game is satisfied. Transferring image element data to a storage area other than the predetermined area, wherein the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the data is higher than the execution frequency of the image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data. Including command means when transfer conditions to be commanded are established,
The data processing means uses an effect image corresponding to the image element data among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means in response to a command from the command means when the transfer condition is established. Image element data whose execution frequency of image display is higher than the execution frequency of image display by the effect image corresponding to the required image element data is read from the image element data storage means and stored in a storage area other than the predetermined storage area Including data transfer means upon establishment to transfer,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The image display control means can specify transfer completion data indicating completion of data transfer from the image element data storage means to the temporary storage means and image element data temporarily stored in the temporary storage means. Including transfer completion data setting means for setting in the storage management table,
The data processing means displays the display data by writing the image element data read from the temporary storage means into the display data storage means in accordance with whether transfer completion data is set in the storage management table. Including a creation determining means for determining whether to execute creation of
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that. The display content determination means includes
A display mode determination unit that determines a display mode of the effect image in the image display unit as one of a plurality of types of display modes when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Corresponding to the display mode of the effect image determined by the display mode determining means, the effect image corresponding to the image element data among the plural types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means Image element data specifying means for specifying image element data whose execution frequency of image display is higher than the execution frequency of image display by an effect image corresponding to required image element data;
In response to the display mode of the effect image being determined by the display mode determination means, an instruction is given to transfer the image element data specified by the image element data specification means to a storage area other than the predetermined area. Display mode determination data transfer command means to
The data processing means produces an effect corresponding to the image element data among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the image element data storage means in response to a command from the display mode determination time data transfer command means. Image element data whose image display execution frequency is higher than the image display execution frequency of the effect image corresponding to the required image element data is read from the image element data storage means and stored in a memory other than the predetermined storage area. Including a data transfer means for determining the display mode to be transferred to the area,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, 2, or 3. The notice effect display determining means includes a notice effect image selecting means for selecting any one of a plurality of kinds of notice effect images at different selection ratios for each type according to the determination result of the prior decision means,
The notice image element data reading means reads out a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of kinds of notice effect images from the image element data storage means, and transfers them to the temporary storage means to store them. Including
The control data setting means is an image corresponding to the notice effect image selected by the notice effect image selection means among a plurality of types of image element data stored in the temporary storage means by the notice image element data transfer means. Set control data for displaying the notice effect image in stages for the element data.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that: The stage display update unit causes the image display unit to display a pixel to be displayed based on the control data set by the control data setting unit among the pixels constituting the notice effect image, while other than the display target By restricting the display of the pixels, the process of displaying the notice effect image step by step with the passage of time,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that: The stage display update means executes a process of displaying the notice effect image step by step as time passes by sequentially synthesizing the notice effect image and the effect image other than the notice effect image.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that: The game control means includes
Based on the fact that the specific display result is determined by the pre-determining means, the game state after the end of the specific game state is the normal game state, and the probability of the specific display result is the normal game The first special gaming state that is higher than the state, and the probability that the specific display result is higher than the normal gaming state, the execution condition for the variable display is more easily established than the normal gaming state and the first special gaming state. A gaming state determination means for determining which of the two special gaming states to control;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state based on the determination result of the gaming state determination means;
Execution of the first notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to one of the first and second special gaming states based on the determination that the specific display result is made by the prior determination means. First notification effect execution determining means for determining presence or absence;
The second determining unit determines whether or not to execute the second notification effect for notifying whether or not the second special gaming state is controlled based on the determination to be the specific display result by the prior determination unit. Notification production execution determining means;
A notification for transmitting a first notification effect control signal capable of specifying a determination result of the first notification effect execution determination means and a second notification effect control signal capable of specifying a determination result of the second notification effect execution determination means. Production control signal transmission means,
The display control means includes
The specific display result is a first specific display result corresponding to being controlled to the normal gaming state or a second specific display result corresponding to being controlled to one of the first and second special gaming states; Specific display result determining means for determining whether to
In response to the fact that the execution of the first notification effect is specified based on the first notification effect control signal, the first notification that causes the first notification effect to be executed after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Production execution control means;
In response to the fact that the execution of the second notification effect is specified based on the second notification effect control signal, the second notification that causes the second notification effect to be executed after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Production execution control means,
In response to the fact that the first notification effect is specified based on the first notification effect control signal, the specific display result determination means determines the first and second special game states by the gaming state determination means. Even if the decision to control to any of the above is made, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is determined as the first specific display result
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that: The game control means includes
Based on the fact that the specific display result is determined by the pre-determining means, the game state after the end of the specific game state is the normal game state, and the probability of the specific display result is the normal game The first special gaming state that is higher than the state, and the probability that the specific display result is higher than the normal gaming state, the execution condition for the variable display is more easily established than the normal gaming state and the first special gaming state. A gaming state determination means for determining which of the two special gaming states to control;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state based on the determination result of the gaming state determination means;
Execution of the first notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to one of the first and second special gaming states based on the determination that the specific display result is made by the prior determination means. First notification effect execution determining means for determining presence or absence;
The second determining unit determines whether or not to execute the second notification effect for notifying whether or not the second special gaming state is controlled based on the determination to be the specific display result by the prior determination unit. Notification production execution determining means;
A notification for transmitting a first notification effect control signal capable of specifying a determination result of the first notification effect execution determination means and a second notification effect control signal capable of specifying a determination result of the second notification effect execution determination means. Production control signal transmission means,
The display control means includes
The specific display result is a first specific display result corresponding to being controlled to the normal gaming state or a second specific display result corresponding to being controlled to one of the first and second special gaming states; Specific display result determining means for determining whether to
Whether the second specific display result is a first special display result corresponding to being controlled to the first special gaming state or a second special display result corresponding to being controlled to the second special gaming state Special display result determination means for determining
In response to the fact that the execution of the first notification effect is specified based on the first notification effect control signal, the first notification that causes the first notification effect to be executed after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Production execution control means;
In response to the fact that the execution of the second notification effect is specified based on the second notification effect control signal, the second notification that causes the second notification effect to be executed after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Production execution control means,
The special display result determining means determines that the second specific display result is determined by the specific display result determining means, and the second notification effect control signal transmitted from the notification effect control signal transmission means is the second notification effect control signal. Corresponding to the fact that the effect is to be executed, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is displayed even if the game state determination means determines to control to the second special game state. Decide on special display results,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that:

Images